Revit Architecture 2008

Metric Tutorials

April 2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . Performing Common Tasks as You Work in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Part 2

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Linking a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Part 3

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 . 112 . 115 . 121 . 126 . 130 . 130 . 133 . 136 . 137 . 140 . 146 . 146 . 149 . 153

Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Contents | v

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 . 160 . 165 . 169 . 172 . 172 . 177 . 179 . 181 . 183 . 189 . 192 . 195 . 195 . 196 . 199 . 204 . 204 . 206 . 206 . 210 . 211 . 215 . 215 . 221 . 223 . 227 . 230 . 231 . 238 . 238 . 244 . 248 . 250 . 252 . 254 . 258 . 259 . 260 . 260 . 262 . 278 . 278 . 283 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292 . 294 . 296

Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . Creating a Component Legend Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

vi | Contents

Working with Revisions . . . . Importing from Other Applications . Importing Image Files . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 297 . 299 . 299 . 300 . 301

Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Part 4

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 . 324 . 327 . 333 . 335 . 337 . 337 . 339 . 340 . 341 . 346 . 346 . 350 . 352 . 355 . 358 . 358 . 360 . 364 . 365 . 367 . 367 . 370 . 372 . 376 . 376 . 377 . 379 . 382 . 382 . 383 . 384 . 384 . 387 . 388 . 388 . 390 . 391 . 394 . 394

Chapter 9 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Contents | vii

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 399 . 401 . 403 . 406 . 406 . 408 . 411 . 411 . 415 . 417 . 420 . 422 . 429 . 429 . 436 . 440

Part 5

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Creating a Daylight Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Part 6

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Creating 3D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a Family . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Origin of a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Priorities for Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Family Parameters and Family Types . . . . Lock geometry to reference planes . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 2D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 . 480 . 481 . 481 . 483 . 484 . 490 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 495 . 496 . 497 . 498 . 503 . 506 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 513 . 519 . 521 . 526 . 538

viii | Contents

Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Complex Model Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening . Modelling a Complex Wall Opening . . . . . . . . . Creating Window Frame Geometry . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Window Sash Parameters . . . . . . . . Defining Visibility Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry . . Creating the Glass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Formulas to Define Width . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Default Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Sill Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Sill Families into the Window Family . . . . Creating a Length Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Sill Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project Environment . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates . . . . . . . . . Model Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Titleblock Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 540 . 545 . 547 . 548 . 551 . 554 . 561 . 565 . 566 . 567 . 570 . 573 . 574 . 574 . 575 . 575 . 577 . 578 . 579 . 580 . 581 . 582 . 583 . 584 . 591 . 594 . 603 . 609 . 612 . 614 . 614 . 616 . 618 . 618 . 618 . 619 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 624 . 626 . 626 . 628 . 628 . 630 . 631 . 631 . 634 . 642 . 644 . 644 . 650 . 653 . 654 . 668 . 669

Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 672 . 673 . 676 . 676 . 682 . 686 . 690 . 693 . 693 . 695 . 698 . 707 . 707 . 708 . 712 . 712 . 716 . 721 . 726 . 728 . 728 . 733 . 735 . 735 . 738 . 738 . 739

Part 7

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 . 744 . 753 . 755 . 755 . 758 . 760 . 764 . 764 . 765 . 768 . 774 . 774 . 778 . 780 . 782 . 785 . 787 . 788 . 789 . 791 . 792 . 793 . 794

Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20 Area Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

x | Contents

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Chapter 21 Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 . 808 . 813 . 815 . 815 . 816 . 819 . 822 . 822 . 825 . 825 . 828 . 832 . 834 . 837 . 842 . 846 . 846 . 853 . 857 . 859 . 860 . 863 . 866 . 866 . 870 . 870 . 876 . 880 . 882 . 889 . 893 . 895 . 899 . 900 . 904 . 904 . 905 . 913 . 916 . 917 . 921 . 932 . 938 . 939 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 943

Chapter 22 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Chapter 23 Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay . Sketching Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls . . . . Adding Structural Columns and Beams . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams and Girders . . . Adding Joists and Purlins . . . . . . . . . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels . . . Defining New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating the Existing Design . . . . . . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation . . . . . Creating a Framing Elevation . . . . . . . Adding Structural Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24 Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

Contents | xi

Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 950 . 950 . 953 . 957 . 961 . 965 . 970 . 970 . 980 . 987

Chapter 26 Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

Chapter 27 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

Chapter 28 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 . 1003 . 1011 . 1014 . 1017 . 1019 . 1020 . 1021 . 1024 . 1026 . 1027

Part 8

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 . 1034 . 1036 . 1038 . 1039 . 1041 . 1041 . 1045 . 1047 . 1048 . 1053 . 1055 . 1056 . 1059 . 1059 . 1060 . 1064 . 1067 . 1069 . 1071 . 1072 . 1074

Chapter 29 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Architecture templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Architecture is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Architecture 2008?
The Revit Architecture platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Architecture model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Architecture 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Architecture uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Architecture uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■ ■

Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit Architecture 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Architecture, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Architecture. Project: In Revit Architecture, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Architecture classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Understanding the Basics | 7

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit Architecture 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Architecture is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

The Title Bar
2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

The Menu Bar
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. Edit. and View. notice a door type is specified. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. Then.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. place the cursor over the menu name. TIP For example. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. click the command name to start the command. and click. To choose commands. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. On the left side of the Options Bar. While working in the drawing area. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. click Toolbar.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. 9 In the Type Selector. notice the list of walls that are available. If you select the Door tool. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Within the drawing area. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First. For example. if you intend to add a door. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.

There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. immediately below the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered 3D images ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 11 Click OK.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. containing buttons grouped by function. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.

Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. delete. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. click the tab. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . and group name. schedules. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. 3D). walls. family category (doors. windows). select Views (all). families.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for executing conceptual massing commands Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab: includes commands for creating construction industry information To access the commands within a tab. families. and rename views. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. reports. elevations. sheets. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. and groups. In the Project Browser.

The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ 13 In the Type Selector. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The browser is dockable. click Wall. After you create a browser organization scheme. click Cancel. double-click the name. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. Do not click. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location.■ ■ To open a view. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.

the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. click Modify. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. Revit Architecture 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2008 Help. 18 On the Design Bar. The Status Bar also provides information. The elevation symbol consists of two parts." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. in conjunction with Tooltips. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. In the Status Bar. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. It highlights when the cursor is over it.In the bottom left corner of the window. In this case. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. When you place the cursor over a component. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. 20 Press TAB. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. regarding selected components within a view.

Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture In this exercise. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. If there is no Help button displayed. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can use this tri-pane. Click the Help button. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. For example. click . you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. click Training Files. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Toolbar: From the Toolbar. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. There are several tools that help you find information. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. Windows: From any window. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command.Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. You can also press SHIFT+F1. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. find a keyword on the Index tab. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.

5 Click Zoom Out (2x). 6 On the View toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options.The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. 8 Click in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 17 .

and drag the cursor in the drawing area. Cnst. and double-click 2nd Flr. on the View toolbar. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Without clicking in the dialog. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. When drawing or modifying a building model. 14 Enter ZR. display along the ends. referred to as shape handles. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. Small blue dots. expand Views (all). called drag controls.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. expand Floor Plans. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Similar controls. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. roll the wheel to zoom the view. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. On a wheel mouse. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. press and hold CTRL. To modify or add snap increments. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. and drag the cursor. click . and select the wall. click Zoom. These are the drag controls. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. bottoms.

you want to move the table closer to the wall. After selecting the element to be moved. to lengthen the wall. require two clicks to complete the command. for example. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. such as Move and Copy.15 Click and drag the left control. click (Move). Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 19 . In this case. Some commands. and click again to specify the ending position. and on the Edit toolbar. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. click to specify the starting position.

Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. select the second item in the list. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. All changes you make to a project are tracked. In this example. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to . as shown. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. and drag it on top of the table. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Select the plant.20 Click next to the lower wall. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 23 On the Undo menu. Move. you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. Press ESC twice. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the Undo command. click Lines. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 21 . On the Design Bar. such as the Lines command. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. on the Standard toolbar. 26 To end the command. 27 Close the file without saving your changes. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. click Modify. Some commands.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Developing Your Designs 2 23 .

24 | Chapter 2 Developing Your Designs .

For example. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other.Creating a Building Information Model 2 In this tutorial. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. the wall or column will move with it. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. a central service core. a wall or a column can be constrained to grid. If the grid moves. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. it is good practice to test the constraints. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. As you develop the building design. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. 25 . you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2008. a curtain wall.

Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. such as a door or window. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. The project datasets have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . In practice. After the beginning exercises. from the product library. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project dataset. you load any required family type that is not in your project.

change their properties. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. 2 In the New Project dialog. and customize the project as necessary. West. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. verify the second option is selected. you design inside the elevation markers. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. expand Views (all).rte. levels. The project is stored as a single file. sheets. South. and residential. Create the project from the default template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. NOTE If you create a project without a template. notice four elevation markers. To create the project file. In views that display elevation markers. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model.Creating the Project In this exercise. and elevation views created in the project by the template. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. 3 Under Template file. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. you will use the default template. you use a template that is provided with the software. and delete them. and families in your project. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. schedules. 5 Click OK. duplicate them. locate the Project Browser. but contains no geometry. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. The new project opens. In the drawing space in the right pane. select Project. and click Browse. Ceiling Plans. reflected ceiling plan views. click Training Files. These views are customizable: you can rename them. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. 7 If necessary. under Create new. For this project. East. and Elevations (Building Elevation). with an RVT extension. expand Floor Plans. views. construction. and settings. Creating the Project | 27 .

After you modify the two default levels. the view you see in the drawing area. 15 For Save as type. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. verify Project Files (*. Two level lines. will be accessible from the Project Browser. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. as well as change their names. and duplicate levels. 10 In the Project Browser. You can add. notice the Legends. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . view the Save Reminder interval. Families. 16 Click Save. and on the General tab. double-click South. display in the south elevation. Schedules/Quantities. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. “Adding Project Levels” on page 28.8 Under Floor Plans. such as schedules and legends. you will want to save your work frequently. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. You change the names of the 2 default levels. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. double-click Metric. Sheets (all). Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). As you design and document your building model. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. 14 For File name. verify that Level 1 displays as bold.rvt) is selected.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. 13 In the file window. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. content and building model reports. and other properties. Groups. enter Revit Retail Building. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. delete. and click Training Files. created by the template. heights.

and double-click South. the other levels move and change with it. and press ENTER. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. or constrained. enter -1800 mm. expand Views (all). enter 0 mm. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. and press ENTER. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and press ENTER. to each other. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. enter 01 Entry Level. and windows within the building model. so that when one level moves. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. enter 00 Foundation. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. 5 In the Project Browser. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. When you begin designing. doors.You learn how the levels are locked. and press ENTER. Adding Project Levels | 29 .

verify and Make Plan View are selected. not all the tabs are visible. and then move it up. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . using a different option. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. and press ESC. verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn. 14 Click Plan View Types. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar.Next. which should display by default. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. you add another level. 21 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 3. right-click. 13 On the Options Bar. click Rename. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. click . When you add the new level. and click OK. and move it slightly upward. Next. click Level. 18 In the Project Browser. enter 3750 mm. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels. under Floor Plans. By default. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. This is the Options Bar. As you move the cursor. 19 Click OK. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. click Level. 16 Enter 3750 mm. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. 23 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and enter 02 Level. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. and for Offset. If it does not. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. and click Basics. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. view the Design Bar. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser.

If you create a level by copying it. as shown. 27 Press ESC. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line.25 Click to place the level line. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. Adding Project Levels | 31 . 26 Rename the level 03 Level. and rename the corresponding views. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. click Modify to end the command. or on the Design Bar. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels.

In a later exercise. the column height changes as well. so that if the roof elevation changes. double-click 00 Foundation. On the Design Bar. click Grid. the levels are no longer constrained. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. select . In the following exercise. and you can move them independently.Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. under Floor Plans. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. By using the grid to control placement of columns. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . “Creating a Column Grid” on page 32. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. specify a start point for the grid line. all the levels move. and specify the grid line endpoint. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. click Modify. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. If you select a level and click its lock. Create vertical column grid lines 1 On the Project Browser. Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. Notice that by moving the top level. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. 3 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor up. When the grid is complete.

Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. Next. click . and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. Click to place the grid line. and click to place the line. and click to place the line. enter 7500 mm. and click to place the line. for Offset. Enter A. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. and press ENTER. and for Offset. 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. for Offset. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. enter 4500 mm. enter 7500 mm. On the Options Bar. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. click Grid. ■ The first vertical grid bay is created. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. Creating a Column Grid | 33 . You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project.

Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar.8 Press ESC. and specify the grid line endpoint. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click Grid. click Dimension. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. On the Options Bar. click Grid. Dimension the grid and lock the grid bay spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. click and specify an Offset of 0 mm. as shown. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. ■ ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid.

■ ■ Select grid line 1. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. Two pins display on the grid lines. and press ESC. and select grid line A. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. click Modify. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. until it is closer to grid line A. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. select grid lines C and 3. click and drag the blue circular grip up. 24 Press ESC. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. and press ESC. 21 Press ESC. By pinning these central grid lines. 15 Starting with grid line A. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. 18 On the Design Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 35 . until it is closer to grid line 5. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will ''grow'' out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. click .14 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. At the left endpoint of the grid line. The pins are hidden. 22 While pressing CTRL. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension.

Add columns to the grid 26 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 30 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). under Floor Plans. select grid line A. Next. click Structural Column. 27 In the Type Selector. click twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. 41 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. select UC-Universal Column: 305x305x97UC. and on the Options Bar. 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. lock it. 36 On the Standard toolbar. If it is unlocked.■ If necessary. for From. click Finish. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 33 While pressing CTRL. 32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 40 On the Options Bar. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. click (Grid Intersection). click Activate Dimensions. select 01 Entry Level. and unlock it. select all of the column grid lines. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Camera. 28 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. and press ENTER. 34 On the Options Bar. 35 Enter 9000 mm. double-click 01 Entry Level. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 38 In the Project Browser. 31 Press ESC. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. For Place By. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. ■ 29 While pressing CTRL. 37 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera.

The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. and click to place the target point of the camera. Creating a Column Grid | 37 . The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A.

and click Rename. displays in bold under 3D Views. and click OK. ■ ■ Right-click 3D View 1. 43 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. “Adding Beams” on page 38. named 3D View 1 by default. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 44 Save the drawing. The current view. and then copy them to the subsequent levels. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. Adding Beams In this exercise. under Views (all).42 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can view all of the columns. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. In the Rename View dialog. expand 3D Views. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. enter To Building.

7 On the Options Bar. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. click Finish. The selected grid lines display as red. under Floor Plans. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Beams | 39 .When you finish adding beams. 10 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. The view is currently set to Coarse. view the icons on the View Control Bar. select each grid line. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. click Beam. 4 Click Medium. the icon on the right side of the scale. 9 On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 6 In the Type Selector. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. click Grid. 8 While pressing CTRL. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands.

When you created the columns. under Floor Plans. select 02 Level. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. right-click.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. select 06 Roof. press and hold SHIFT. 12 On the View toolbar. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. 14 Select one of the beams. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. click to view the default 3D view of the structure. which only extend to the 5th level. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click Select All Instances. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. 13 On the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click OK.

for Top Level. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. click . under Instance Parameters. 06 Roof. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. under Constraints. and if necessary. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. and click Select All Instances. 22 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click Element Properties. 24 Press ESC. 21 With the column selected. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. right-click. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. 20 Click Cancel. view the Top Level Constraint parameter. All of the columns display as red. resize the view to see the entire structure. 25 In the Project Browser. select 06 Roof. double-click To Building. The columns now extend to the top level of the building.Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. Adding Beams | 41 .

and click Hidden line. double-click South. as lines only. 28 Save the drawing.View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. but want to display them in less detail. under Elevations. and click Coarse. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . area. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Detail Level. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. “Adding Braces” on page 43.

4 Select the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. double-click 00 Foundation.Adding Braces In this exercise. you create 8 framing elevation views. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Braces | 43 . verify Attach to Grid is selected. double-click the elevation marker arrow. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. and press ESC to end the command. under Floor Plans. click Framing Elevation. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. To better add the braces to the structure. 3 On the Options Bar. you add braces to the four corners of the building structure.

and when the endpoint snap displays. 6 Use the grips that display on the crop region to adjust both sides of the view. 8 In the Type Selector. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. click to specify the start point of the brace. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. press ESC. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. but when placed the braces are placed. After you add the final brace. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected.The associated framing elevation view displays. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. click Brace. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 7 On the Design Bar. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 Using the same technique.

Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. enter 18000 mm. The height of the roof lowers. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. Adding Braces | 45 .Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. and press ENTER. delete it and redraw it.

but this time add them from right to left. enter 10000 mm. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. 21 Select grid line A. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. double-click 00 Foundation. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). 14 On the Standard toolbar. as shown in the 3D view below. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and on the Options Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. click Activate Dimensions. and press ENTER. Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. click twice to restore the original level heights. Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 19 In the Project Browser. enter 12000 mm. and press ENTER. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure.

lock it.23 In the Project Browser. Creating a Foundation | 47 . click 3 times to restore the locked dimension. grid size. “Creating a Foundation” on page 47. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click South. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. and drag it away from the structure. 29 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. and if necessary. under Floor Plans. 26 In the Project Browser. beams. double-click 3D. Test connectivity of the columns. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. 28 On the Standard toolbar. and roof height. double-click 00 Foundation. 31 Save the drawing. under 3D Views.

and press ESC. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. click Training Files. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. for View Range. The foundation pile cap now displays. 9 Close the warning dialog. In the View Range dialog.rfa. under Floor Plans. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. under View Depth. and expand Structural Foundation. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit. expand Families. In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 00 Foundation.Before you can add the pile caps. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900 mm. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. where you must adjust the view range before you can view them. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. A warning displays. Click OK twice. and how to load specific families into a project. The pile cap has been added in the view. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. After you load the pile cap family. under Extents. and click View Properties. and drag it to the drawing area. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. select Unlimited. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. Verify the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. for Level.

Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. Creating a Foundation | 49 . When the final pile cap is placed. under 3D Views. 13 In the Project Browser. press ESC. and click Create Similar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and braces that you used to create the building structure. right-click. click Modify. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Select one of the columns. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure.rvt. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 Proceed to the next exercise.14 Click File menu ➤ Save.5CHS. 4 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. All of the columns in the building model display as red. beams. “Changing Structural Member Types” on page 50. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. beam. 3 In the Type Selector. you change the types of the columns. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. and brace families into the project. under 3D Views. double-click 3D. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column: 508x12. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. and click Select All Instances. View the round hollow columns in the building model. You load new column.

and click OK twice. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. Change the brace type 8 On the Design Bar.6x15. 16 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 17 While pressing CTRL. The brace type changes. enter 75 mm. 18 In the Type Selector. click Modify. double-click Elevation 1-a. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS203. for Type. under Dimensions. 9 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Type Selector. and changing its size parameter. 19 On the Design Bar. right-click. click Brace. click Modify. 10 On the Options Bar. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75 mm. you change the brace type. select M_Round Bar: 75 mm. for d. the braces as well as the beams change. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.9. and click Select All Instances. enter 75 mm. select M_Round Bar: 25mm. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. select the braces in the elevation one by one. but it is the only size of its type currently available. click Duplicate. 15 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Design Bar.Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. This not the size that you want to use. In the following steps. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar.2x101. click Edit/New. Changing Structural Member Types | 51 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 13 In the Name dialog. click .

click Floor.rvt. You are now in the sketch editor. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. such as roofs. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. Some other Revit Architecture elements. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. To create floors. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. “Adding Floors” on page 52. click Training Files. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. Adding Floors In this exercise. and elements in the current view display as gray. stairs. and railings are also created from sketches. ■ On the Sketch tab. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. click Lines. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level.

and then the 1st horizontal grid line. click . Leave this dimension unlocked. 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. At the top left corner of the grid. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar.■ ■ On the Options Bar. If the grid changes size. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important. Adding Floors | 53 . as you resize it in the next steps. Move the cursor to the left. Do not lock the dimension. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Using a crossing window. select the top floor line. click Dimension. past the first vertical grid line. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. and click above the 1st horizontal grid line to place the dimension. Do not lock the dimensions.

Enter 300 mm. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Select and lock the dimensions. 8 Select the floor. this is how you would do it.6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. click Modify. Next. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. If you needed to modify the floor after you created it. They display on the floor sketch. Move the cursor to the right dimension. At the top left corner of the grid. using a different sketching technique. click Quit Sketch. and change their values to 300 mm. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. and on the Options Bar. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. on the Design Bar. select the top floor line. 7 On the Design Bar. click . and click the temporary dimension value. press ENTER. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300 mm. and then press ESC.

and move the cursor until the dashed green line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. 13 At the bottom right corner of the grid.Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. Select the three remaining floor lines. The 02 Level floor displays. and press ESC. under Floor Plans. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. On the Sketch tab. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. and lock the dimensions. click Floor. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. Adding Floors | 55 . and for Offset. enter 1500mm. double-click 02 Level. click Lines. On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. click . ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. click Finish Sketch. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 18 On the Options Bar. click Align . 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. double-click 03 Level. 20 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Floor. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. under Floor Plans. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. click Lines. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate the Align command is active. click .Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. Click the locks to constrain the floors. and a lock icon displays.

38 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floors. 41 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay. double-click 01 Entry Level. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. click Model Graphics Style. and click OK. 40 Select grid line A. click Edit. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. click Finish Sketch. and click Shading with Edges. 31 In the Project Browser. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 37 On the View Control Bar. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. and unlock it. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.24 On the Design Bar. under Views ➤ 3D Views. and enter 4500 mm. View the floors in the 3D building model and test connectivity 36 In the Project Browser. and click Activate Dimensions. Alternatively. under Floor Plans. Adding Floors | 57 . dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 39 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. double-click {3D}. 35 On the Design Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. and lock the edges. select 05 Roof Garden. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. 32 Select the floor.

and lock the dimension that you unlocked in a previous step. Adding a Roof In this exercise. 44 In the Project Browser. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click 00 Foundation. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. double-click {3D} to view the grid. you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building. “Adding a Roof ” on page 58. under Floor Plans. under 3D Views. 43 On the Standard toolbar. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .42 In the Project Browser. click to restore the grid bay size to 7500 mm.

and specify which roof edges will define the roof slope. 3 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. Adding a Roof | 59 . When a green dashed line displays. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Defines Slope. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. and press ENTER. click Training Files. double-click 06 Roof. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser.To create the roof. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. of the roof in a plan view. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. ■ ■ For Offset. You sketch the footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to place the roof line. enter 1800 mm. click Lines. Click . 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. or the perimeter.

Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. 10 Press ESC. and when the green dashed line displays. ■ 60 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . For Offset. and lock it. click (Trim/Extend). and lock it. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). enter 0 mm. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line. click to place the roof line. 7 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Defines Slope. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker.6 Select grid line 5.

click Finish Roof. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. for Slope Angle. click .00. Change the roof slope 16 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Design Bar. double-click 06 Roof. View the roof 19 On the View toolbar. under Dimensions. View the roof 14 On the View toolbar. click . 17 Select the roof. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 15 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. enter 4. Adding a Roof | 61 . place a dimension between the roof slope edges and the grid to constrain them. under Floor Plans.12 Optionally.

click Wall. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. for Join Condition. for Spacing. you add a curtain wall. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. enter Retail Storefront. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. click Training Files. click Edit/New. for Type. enter 1050 mm. 3 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ Click . the curtain wall resizes with it. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 In the Name dialog. select Curtain Wall: Storefront. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click OK twice. for Spacing. under Floor Plans. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. so if you resize the grid.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. “Adding a Curtain Wall” on page 62. The type is saved in the project. enter 2100 mm. Under Construction. When you duplicate a type. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. click 01 Entry Level.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

13 On the Design Bar. so they remain in the view. If you want to hide them. select 05 Roof Garden. If the grid moves. select 01 Entry Level. you can delete the dimension. and move it slightly toward the building interior. Adding a Curtain Wall | 63 . For Height. dimension both corners of the curtain wall to the grid.■ ■ ■ For Level. the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. and trim each curtain wall segment. 9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint. enter 600 mm. For Offset. click (Trim/Extend). Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the dimensions. but opt to keep the constraint when prompted. click Dimension. click to place the 1st curtain wall segment. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. 10 When a green dashed line displays. These dimensions are not in a sketch.

64 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Hidden Line. under 3D Views. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating an Entrance” on page 65. 15 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style.View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and click Shading with Edges. double-click To Building. Click Model Graphics Style.

click All. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance.rvt.Creating an Entrance In this exercise. To better work with the curtain wall panels. All the elements in the list are selected. and double-click South. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Detail Level. clear one element to clear all the elements. 6 Under Visibility. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. under Views (all). 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Medium. 2 On the View Control Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. and click None. 5 Under Visibility. under the element list. Creating an Entrance | 65 . 4 On the Model Categories tab. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. click Training Files.

10 Select 1 panel. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 12 With the panels selected. 7 Click OK. in the Type Selector. as these usually represent internal pilasters.Do not select Columns. 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Select View Template dialog. 15 Zoom to the drawing extents. and click OK. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. select Architectural Elevation. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. click Modify. press and hold CTRL. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. select System Panel: Solid.

you see that the visibility of many of the Model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 19 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Project Browser. Creating an Entrance | 67 . in this case an architectural elevation. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. under 3D Views. double-click To Building. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for.16 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}.

20 In the Project Browser. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. and click to select it. 23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 24 On the Options Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). select another mullion to the right. click Add or Remove Segments. double-click South.

and view the new entrance. Creating an Entrance | 69 . select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. click Modify. 32 In the Type Selector. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. click . 34 On the View toolbar. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 30 On the Design Bar. and unpin it.27 On the Options Bar. select One Segment.

remove the mullions from the 2nd. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .36 Zoom in to the first panel. select it. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 39 Using the same process. 3rd. press TAB until it is selected. 38 Press DELETE. and unpin it. and 4th panels.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. open the North elevation. and click View Properties. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click in the view.rvt. under Floor Plans. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Graphics. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. 5 Click OK. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Training Files. select 02 Level.40 Optionally. double-click 01 Entry Level. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. for Underlay. “Creating a Drop Ceiling” on page 71. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 71 . 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Callout. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. which indicates you must draw the callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. and specify a point to complete the callout. select the grip closest to the callout head.

and specify a point past grid line D. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 73 . Move the cursor horizontally to the left. and click Flip Section. 16 Select the section box. ■ ■ Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. enter Display Area. and click Rename. click Section. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. right-click. and click OK. 14 Press ESC. 12 Draw a section line. 10 In the Rename View dialog.9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 13 Select the section line.

19 In the Project Browser.17 In the Project Browser. and lock the dimension. and click OK. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Ceiling. 21 In the Type Selector. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . expand Sections (Building Section). select Finish Face: Exterior. right-click Section 1. 27 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . Click . and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm rectangular wall inside the grid lines. select Wall faces. click Dimension. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. and lock the dimension. and click Rename. 30 In the Project Browser. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Sketch. for Prefer. Lock both alignments. 32 In the Type Selector. click Wall. under Ceiling Plans. 26 On the Design Bar. 25 Press ESC. 24 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. enter Section Display Area. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. For Loc Line. select Basic Wall: Interior-135mm Partition (2 hr). select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600 mm Grid. click (Align).

37 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. 36 Press ESC.■ Click Click . . Creating a Drop Ceiling | 75 . click Finish Sketch. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls. 38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section). 41 On the Options Bar. and click to select the walls. ■ 34 Sketch the ceiling within the walls. 39 On the View Control Bar. double-click Section Display Area. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. click .

47 In the Project Browser. To position the grid. enter 2700 mm. Select the 02 Level Floor. click Modify. click Move. double-click 01 Entry Level. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. for Height Offset From Level. click Attach. 46 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. 43 On the Design Bar. and click to select the walls. 48 Modify the ceiling grid: ■ To start the tiles on a wall edge. under Ceiling Plans. ■ 76 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and specify a distance. select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line. enter 2700 mm. and drag it to the interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall. and click OK. for Top/Base. and click . on the Tools toolbar. 44 Select the ceiling.42 In the Element Properties dialog. On the Options Bar. under Constraints. under Constraints. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Base Offset. select a grid line. and click OK. press TAB until you select the wall chain.

for Structure. 52 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 77 . 53 Click OK. for Type. 58 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. click Cancel. click Cancel. 51 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Rotate). Rotate the ceiling grid 56 Select the center ceiling grid line. view the ceiling structure. click Edit. and click .View the ceiling structure 49 Select the ceiling. under Construction. 57 On the Options Bar. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. 54 In the Type Properties dialog.

59 Click. 60 Press ESC. 61 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. and press ENTER. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 45.

65 Optionally. double-click To Building. 63 On the View Control Bar. you must cut an opening through the floors on each level. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 79 . After the stairs and stairwell have been copied to levels 01-05. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating Multi-Level Stairs” on page 79. 64 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows On. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building.View the building in 3D with shadows 62 In the Project Browser. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Shadows Off. and then copying it to the 05 Level. Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. You begin by creating a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. under 3D Views.

and 3. under Floor Plans. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. Move the cursor vertically.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Ref Plane. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the area defined by grid lines B. You will create the stair in the area between these columns. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Training Files. click to specify the start point of the reference plane. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair_.rvt. When the temporary dimensions indicate the cursor is 1500 mm from the grid line intersection. ■ 80 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 5 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor over the intersection of grid lines C and 3. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and specify the reference plane endpoint on grid line B. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. C. Move the cursor to the left along grid line 3. double-click 01 Entry Level. 2.

■ Draw another reference plane 1500 mm from grid line 2. and specify a point to create first stair flight. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 81 . click Stairs. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane.

■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. ■ 12 Draw walls around the stair. click Align. 10 In the Type Selector. Move the cursor down. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. and specify a point. Click . 8 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Tools toolbar. click Wall. 14 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. 15 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. The complete stair displays. and select the 2nd reference plane. and lock the alignment. and click to select it. beyond the end of the stair. with a message that 20 risers have been created and that 0 remain. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. select Finish Face: Interior. including its handrails. select Basic Wall: Generic . 16 Using the same technique.225mm Masonry. 9 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line.

and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. and specify a point away from the wall. enter 1200 mm. Lock the dimension. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 83 . 19 Select the dimension. select the dimension value. 21 Select the stair. 18 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click Modify. a warning displays. 20 Click OK to delete the dimension. Select the bottom of the stair. and press DELETE.17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Standard toolbar. click Dimension. Select the interior face of the wall. Because the dimension is constrained. click . 23 While pressing CTRL. select both reference planes. select Wall faces. for Prefer. The stair and walls move to the left. Select the wall. and press ENTER. and press DELETE.

for Base Constraint. 35 Press SHIFT. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. Click OK. click . Under Constraints. Click OK. and click . and click 30 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select 05 Roof Garden. 31 Select the stair. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. clear Tag on Placement. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. select all 4 walls. TIP To flip the door swing. for Multistory Top Level. . 33 On the View toolbar. and move the cursor to spin the building model. click Modify. 29 While pressing CTRL. press and hold the left mouse button. 26 On the Options Bar. verify Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. 28 On the Design Bar. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the left corner of your screen. 25 In the Type Selector. select 00 Foundation. but if you view the top level of the building. click 34 On the View toolbar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. click Door. 27 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building.Add a door to the stairwell 24 On the Design Bar. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. For Top Constraint. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

click Align.Create a shaft opening 36 In the Project Browser. 48 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 39 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click . under Floor Plans. 47 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 41 On the Tools toolbar. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. and lock the alignment. Copy the door to multiple levels 46 Select the door. 37 Zoom in to the stairs. and lock the alignments. 44 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 45 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 38 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 42 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 85 . . 43 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. ■ 40 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs.

. 57 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. Under Constraints. By offsetting the base. under Floor Plans.49 In the Select Levels dialog. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. click 56 On the View toolbar. 52 In the Project Browser. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. 55 On the View toolbar. click . . and click OK. ■ For Top Constraint. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. and spin the building so you can see the roof. and click OK. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. View the shaft and stair 50 On the View toolbar. click . 53 Select the shaft. for Base Offset. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . enter 300 mm. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 01 Entry Level. click 51 On the View toolbar.

“Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height” on page 87. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. click Training Files. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 87 . You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof Level. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.58 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. 59 Proceed to the next exercise.

5 In the Type Selector. under Graphics. select Core Face: Interior. and press ENTER. select 06 Roof. select Basic Wall: Generic . under Floor Plans. 10 Change the dimension value: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Select the dimension value. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click View Properties. for Underlay. Enter 1050 mm. double-click 05 Roof Garden.Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. click Wall. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Right-click in the view. and draw a 10650 mm wall along grid line 3. for Loc Line. click Modify. Select the wall.225mm Masonry. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. 9 Dimension the space between grid line C and the left face of the wall on grid line 3. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 7 Move the cursor near the column at the intersection of grid lines C and 3. and click OK.

Modify the profile of the wall 14 On the Design Bar. 19 Press ESC. and then select the right face of the wall. 18 Select the top endpoint of the left vertical profile line. 12 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. click Modify. The profile of the wall that you just modified displays as a purple sketch. 17 On the Design Bar. 15 Select the wall. and click to place a line. double-click Elevation: South.11 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor up 6000 mm. 21 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical profile line. 23 Press ESC. and click to place a line. The South elevation displays. 13 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. click (Align). click Lines. 16 In the Go To View dialog. click Lines. and click to place a line. 20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor up 4500 mm. and on the Options Bar. click Edit Profile. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 89 . 22 Move the cursor horizontally 1520 mm to the left.

26 Snap to the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 30 Using the Quadrant snap. 25 On the Options Bar. Select the top right portion of the circle. 28 On the Design Bar. 31 Move the cursor to the left. click the drop-down arrow that displays next to the sketching tools. Select the top right portion of the circle. Select the top horizontal profile line. and select the endpoint of the left vertical profile line. 32 Click Modify. Press ESC. click Lines.24 On the Design Bar. and click (Circle). and click to place it. click (Trim/Extend). click Lines. 29 On the Options Bar. click . snap to the top of the circle. Select the short right profile line. and select it. 27 Press ESC. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1520 mm displays. 33 Trim the profile lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.

and select the wall. click . 37 On the Design Bar. 36 Snap to the endpoint of the short horizontal line. 35 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 38 On the Design Bar. 43 In the Warning dialog. unlock it. note that for Top Constraint. click . 45 On the Options Bar. click Continue. 42 On the Design Bar. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1000 mm displays. and press DELETE. 47 Click Cancel. select the short horizontal line on the right. You need a closed sketch to complete the profile. 48 Change the 06 Roof level height to 19000 mm. 39 In the Error dialog. By adding extra height to the wall. 44 On the Design Bar. instead of lengthening the existing edge. click Lines. Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. you maintained the relationship to the roof level. and press DELETE. 40 On the Design Bar. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 91 . click the Close button. click Modify.34 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. click Finish Sketch. click Modify. 41 Select the horizontal line across the middle of the profile sketch. under Constraints.

under 3D Views. double-click 3D. you place planters on the 05 Roof level to create a roof garden. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. “Adding Entourage and Site Components” on page 92. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .49 On the Standard toolbar. click to restore the original height of the roof. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. View the wall 50 In the Project Browser. You learn how to load these components into the project. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. and how to place and adjust them in project views. 51 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest.

between grid lines C and D. 3 In the Type Selector. click Component. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. under Floor Plans. Create the roof garden 1 On the Project Browser. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed green line that helps you to place the next planter. as shown. double-click 05 Roof Garden. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 93 . and open Metric\m_RRB_host. select M_Planter : 1200 x 1200mm.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. TIP After you place the 1st planter.

under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate.5. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. 17 Click Apply. under Other. 15 In the Name dialog. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. 10 View the roof. double-click 01 Entry Level. click . click .Deciduous: Cornus Florida 4. enter 1500 mm. select Tree . 6 In the Type Selector.5 On the Basics tab. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. click Component. select the 2 remaining trees.5 Meters. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. and press ESC. under Floor Plans. 8 On the View toolbar. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. double-click 05 Roof Garden.5 Meters. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 20 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. for Type. select M_Tree . 18 While pressing CTRL. and in the Type Selector. for Plant Height. enter Cornus Florida 1. and then click OK twice. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .Deciduous: Cornus Florida 1. 12 Select 1 of the trees.

Adding Entourage and Site Components | 95 . ■ ■ For Offset. click Lines. 28 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 27 On the Options Bar. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 23 On the Options Bar: Click . 22 On the Design Bar. enter 2400 mm. and click to place the line. for Offset. 24 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. and click to sketch a line. enter 0 mm. and click to sketch a line. 25 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 26 Using the same method.21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 29 Select the right vertical floor line. click Floor.

35 Select the line that you just drew. 31 On the Options Bar.30 On the Options Bar. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 38 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. and click to finish the line. and click to finish the line. 34 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor up 900 mm. click Finish Sketch. 32 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. clear Chain. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Trim/Extend). The completed sidewalk displays. click . and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B.

40 In the Element Properties dialog. 52 Move the cursor toward the column. In plan view. and click to place her on the sidewalk. as it is currently a floor element. 43 Click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. 49 On the Options Bar. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 45 Click OK. click Component. select M_RPC Male: Alex. and specify a point to rotate him so he is facing the column. near Column E5. create a new type for the sidewalk element. and second line inside the circle indicates the person’s line of sight. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 97 . select Rotate after placement. for Type. 42 In the Name dialog. 48 In the Type Selector. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk.Next. 53 In the Type Selector. 51 Move the cursor so the rotation line displays along Alex’s line of sight and specify a point. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. click Duplicate. enter -250 mm. enter Sidewalk. for Height Offset from Level. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. RPC people are represented by a circle. 39 Select the sidewalk. under Constraints. click . The circle is divided in half by a line.

63 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk. and on the Options Bar. enter -300 mm. Next. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. and click OK. click Camera. for Offset. under Constraints. 61 In the Project Browser. 57 Press ESC. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. double-click West. 59 In the camera view (3D View 1). click the car. click Pick Host. 56 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. under Elevations. and click . When you select a host for a component. 55 In the Type Selector. select M_RPC Beetle. 60 In the Element Properties dialog.54 Rotate Cathy so she is facing Alex. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. 62 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. 64 Select Cathy. 58 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. 67 Click the sidewalk. double-click To Building. 71 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. click Pick Host. “Linking a Service Core to the Building Project” on page 99. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 99 . If the sidewalk changes height. View the front of the building 70 In the Project Browser. and replace them with a service core. 69 Using the same method. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. 66 Select Alex. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.65 Click the sidewalk. 68 Select and move both Cathy and Alex until they are standing on the sidewalk. and on the Options Bar.

The service core is contained in an external file that you link to your current project. click . click 5 On the View toolbar. double-click 06 Roof. you delete the entire stairwell. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_host_style_railings. including the stairs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. press SHIFT. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. 4 On the View toolbar. and spin the building. After the service core is linked to your project. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and press DELETE. so it will cut through the floors of the building. and shaft opening. under Floor Plans.rvt. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 On the Project Browser. 100 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 Select the entire stairwell. you must cut another shaft opening around it. walls. . By deleting the stairwell from the 06 Roof.

7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. 8 In the left pane of the Add Link dialog. under Positioning: ■ ■ Select Manually place. select m_RRB_link. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 101 . 10 At the bottom of the dialog. click (Align). You cannot constrain elements in the current project to elements in linked models.Link a new service core into the building model 6 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Metric folder. 13 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. Do not click the lock to constrain the core and floor.rvt. and then select the top horizontal core wall. 12 Specify a point to place it between grid lines B-D. The building service core displays in your drawing. 14 Select the top horizontal floor line. 11 Click Open. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. Select Cursor at center.

Under Constraints. click . click Lines. For Top Constraint. select Chain. for Base Offset. 17 On the Options Bar. click 24 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. Click OK. click Finish Sketch. 19 Trace the outer edges of the core elements to sketch the service core as shown: 20 On the Design Bar.Create a shaft opening for the service core 15 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. View the service core in the building model 23 On the View toolbar. select Up to level: 06 Roof. 18 On the Options Bar. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. enter 300 mm. click . 102 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 Select the shaft opening and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ .

click Training Files.rvt. where it is hosted within a railing family. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. expand Renderings. and double-click Lounge Perspective. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. click Training Files. you add glass railings around the floor edges. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 103 . and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. “Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings” on page 103. in the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 Proceed to the final exercise. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. Notice the glass railing in the foreground.rvt. The rendering displays. and spin the building to get a better view of the core. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. After you modify it. 3 In the new project. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. press SHIFT. You can see that the service core cuts through the floors of the building.. and open Metric\m_Conference.

and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog.rvt or m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. Modify the 02 Level floor 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. press and hold CTRL.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. and Parapet. 15 On the Design Bar. double-click 02 Level. 10 Close the warning dialog that displays. click Modify. The floor sketch displays. expand Families. click (Split). and expand Railings. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Revit Retail Building. and click to split the floor. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 5 Expand Railing. Handrail only. and select Glass. and on the Options Bar. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 12 Select the floor. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. click OK. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. 13 On the Options Bar.rvt. click Edit.

and click the lock to lock the alignment. 24 On the Tools toolbar. click . select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 27 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). and lock the alignment. click Lines. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. 25 Select grid line B. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. and click to place it. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 20 Move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm and click to draw another line. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long.18 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 105 . and click to draw another line. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 26 Select grid line D.

and click OK. enter 100 mm. 33 On the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. For Offset. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. Lock the dimensions. click Dimension. click Dimension. click Finish Sketch. select Glass.rvt project. 30 On the Design Bar. click Railing. for Type.29 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Revit dialog. click Railing Properties. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. 106 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 On the Design Bar.

View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. click Camera. You can view the railing that you just added. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 107 .39 Click Finish Sketch. Click Model Graphics ➤ Shading with Edges. A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics ➤ Hidden Line.

43 Close all project drawings.■ Click Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region to hide the frame around the view. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2008. exterior fire stairs. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. and a roof garden. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units.Documenting Your Projects 3 In this section of the tutorials. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. balconies. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. lofty ceilings. 109 .

NOTE For training purposes. 110 | Chapter 3 Documenting Your Projects . slight modifications to the building design have been made.

section. elevation. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. including plan.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 3 In this tutorial. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 111 . you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project.

Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. 112 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. you learn how to create views from a building model. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. how to create section and elevation views.Creating Views In this lesson. You learn how to create new views from existing views. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click OK.rvt. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. Duplicating Plan Views | 113 . Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Project Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 9 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. and click OK. click Training Files. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 8 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Level 2. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. under Floor Plans. expand Floor Plans.

Next. 14 On the View Control Bar. and click 1: 1000. 13 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Vicinity Plan. 12 In the Rename View dialog. click the current scale. 114 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. enter Vicinity Plan. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 11 Under Floor Plans. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 115 . All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.16 Right-click. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.

116 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. click Elevation.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. for Scale. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. select1:100. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 11 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. click Modify. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. enter South East. 10 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 117 . click Modify. and click OK. double-click South East. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building.

select Section: Building Section. click Section. ■ Move the cursor down. under Views (all). select 1:100. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 14 In the Type Selector. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. expand Floor Plans.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 118 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 1. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale.

click Split Segment. Click the midpoint of the section line.18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 119 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. and click to place it.

24 Select gridline F.21 On the Design Bar. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. expand Sections (Building Section). 23 On the View Control Bar. 120 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and double-click Section 1. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. click Modify. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble.

rvt. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. To create each view.25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view . you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view. Creating Callout Views | 121 .Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

for Scale. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. click Modify. under Floor Plans. select 1:50. 3 In the Type Selector. 122 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and specify a point to complete the callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Callout. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan. and select the callout boundary.

Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 7 On the Design Bar.■ Select the middle grip. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. click Modify. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Creating Callout Views | 123 . and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 9 In the Rename View dialog.

select 1:50. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. double-click Section 1. under Sections (Building Sections). and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 124 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. click Callout. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Detail View: Detail. 13 In the Type Selector.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. for Scale. 14 On the Options Bar.

18 In the Rename View dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. under Detail Views (Details). expand Detail Views (Details). Creating Callout Views | 125 . and click OK. double-click Roof Overhang Detail.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Project Browser.

Existing stair callout head and boundary 126 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. the elevation markers.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. You change the appearance of the section mark head. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.

scroll to Section Line. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.Filled.Custom. 8 In the Name dialog. 15 Under Category. select the current project. select Custom-Section Head. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. double-click Level 1. click Duplicate. under Floor Plans. and click Open. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 127 . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Section Head – Custom. click Training Files.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Load into Project. 10 On the floor plan.rfa. and click OK. . 14 In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK twice. 12 For Section Tag. 4 On the Design Bar. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. and can be applied to the section line. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. open Metric\Families\Annotations. and click OK. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. Section Tail . select Section Head . The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. clear any others.rvt. select the section line. Section Tail – Filled. for Section Head. click the Annotation Objects tab.

scroll to Section Marks. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 22 In the Name dialog. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. . click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. select 12. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. open Metric\Families\Annotations. click Load into Project. Click OK. select 3. On the floor plan. enter 12. and select 2.5mm Square. 17 Under Category. For Line Weight. for Elevation Tag. and select 3. click Duplicate. click Training Files. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. notice the square elevation markers that display. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click Open.5 mm. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line.5mm Square. select Square. On the floor plan. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 Click OK. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 30 On the Design Bar. clear all others. enter 12. 27 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 128 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Custom-Callout Head.rfa. select the current project. and click OK. and click OK.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays.

40 Press ESC. 38 In the Type Properties dialog.33 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 39 Click OK twice. and select 4. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 49 Click OK. . enter . Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and select 7. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 36 In the drawing. select the callout. select . 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. enter 6 mm. 46 Under Category. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. click Edit/New. click the Annotation Objects tab. select Dash. expand Callout Boundary. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 34 In the Name dialog. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. for Callout Tag. 45 For Line Pattern. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 43 Under Category. For Corner Radius. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 129 . 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. Click OK.

you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. filters. click Training Files. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. and apply it to multiple elevation views.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. and double-click East. under Elevations. 130 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . view regions. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. masking regions. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a View Template In this exercise. You learn to create view templates.rvt. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To accomplish this. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and visual overrides. The crop region displays as red.

13 Under Visibility. right-click East.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 4 On the Design Bar. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Entourage. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. and click Properties. under Extents. 8 Click OK. 6 On the Project Browser. 5 On the View Toolbar. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 131 . clear Crop Region Visible. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Zoom to Fit. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. under Visibility. under Elevations.

20 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. and click Apply View Template. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. and click OK. under Elevations. 132 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Callouts. and section lines are now hidden in the view. right-click North. 17 In the New View Template dialog. and click OK. and click Create View Template From View. grids. click OK. 18 In the View Templates dialog.14 Click OK. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. double-click North. 19 In the Project Browser. click Apply. under Elevations. levels. elevation markers. 15 On the View Control bar. right-click East. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 16 In the Project Browser.

right-click. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. for Level. for Bottom. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click Penthouse. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Floor Plans. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Penthouse. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. under Extents. for View Range.rvt. click Edit. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level Below (Level 4). 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and click Properties. Under View Depth. select Level Below (Level 4). Click OK twice. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. and the exterior area on the south side of the building.rvt. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. View Range and Plan Regions | 133 . 2 In the Project Browser.

Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. under Extents. select Level 4. select Level 4. Under View Depth. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Roof Plan. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Edit. and click Properties. for View Range. for Bottom. 134 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click OK twice. for Level. select Roof Plan. under Floor Plans. right-click.

16 On the Design Bar. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. select Unlimited. 11 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. View Range and Plan Regions | 135 . click Plan Region. click Edit. Move you cursor diagonally. under Extents. In the left corner of the building. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. select Unlimited. Under View Depth. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Lines. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. for View Range. for Level. for Bottom. Click OK twice. click Region Property.

8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. 5 In the Filters dialog. select Fire Rating. under Filters. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. under Categories. enter Rated Walls. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. click (New). select Walls. After you apply the filter. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 136 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. in this case. 7 In the Filters dialog.rvt. click the Filters tab.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. the fire rating of the walls. and click OK. under Views (all). 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill.

apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. Masking Portions of a View | 137 . for Pattern. select Solid Fill. Enter Hr. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 10 On the Filter tab. 12 On the Filter tab. 9 Click OK. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. and click OK. click Remove. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. for Rated Walls. for Color. click Add. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. click OK. and click OK. 14 In the Color dialog.■ ■ Select contains. 17 Using the same method. select the red color. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click No Override. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. To accomplish this. and click OK. under Basic colors. under Projection/Surface. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. click Override under Patterns. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 16 Click OK. 11 Select Rated Walls.

1 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 4 On the View Control Bar.rvt. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 5 On the View menu. right-click. and click OK. 138 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Show Crop Region. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. as shown. under Floor Plans. 2 Select Copy of Level 1.

Masking Portions of a View | 139 . 8 Select the crop region. click (Rectangle). NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region.7 On the View menu. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 11 In the Type Selector. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the View Control Bar. select Invisible lines. 12 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Masking Region.

1 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan.14 On the Design Bar.rvt. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan.Level 1. 140 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. right-click Unit 18 Plan . under Floor Plans. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects.

10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Override. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. click in the Patterns field. for Color. 3 In the Rename View dialog. for Pattern. and click OK. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. right-click. under Pattern Overrides.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. Working with Visual Overrides | 141 . 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Rename. and click 1: 50. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 7 Under Cut. 11 Click OK twice. and click OK. select Walls. 4 On the View Control Bar. click No Override. right-click. select Solid fill. under Visibility. click black. click the current scale.

13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. 12 On the Design Bar.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. under Visibility. clear Floors. 16 Under Visibility. click Modify. 142 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Grids.

and click Hide in View ➤ Category. Working with Visual Overrides | 143 .18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.

28 For Color. click Override. and click OK. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click Projection Lines. for Pattern. under Lines. select a bright green color. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 25 Click OK twice.20 Right-click. and click OK twice. 21 Under Projection/Surface. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 144 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 23 In the Color dialog. select the sofa. By using the previous method to make the selection. click By Category Override. click No Override. for Color. 29 In the Color dialog. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Dash. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. click a purple color. right-click.

The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 32 Select one of the lamps. 33 On the View Control Bar. right-click. click . click Modify. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. The hidden crop region is also revealed. Working with Visual Overrides | 145 .30 On the Design Bar.

select A0 metric.Creating Sheets. and click View. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. 146 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. right-click.34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. click Training Files. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. how to add views to the sheets.rvt. click Sheet. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.

The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. enter Site Plan. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the title block. 5 When the title block highlights. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click Modify. expand Sheets (all).A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. on the Options Bar. For Sheet Name. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). enter A101. Creating Drawing Sheets | 147 . The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project.Unnamed. 3 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Number.

2007. enter 15 May. enter For Approval. The new project information displays in the titleblock.■ Click OK. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter 2007-1. 14 Click OK. Smith. 7 On the Design Bar. under Other. MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Project Name. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 148 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Project Address. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. click Edit. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter J. For Client Name. click Modify. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For Project Number. For Project Status.

and click Rename. enter Floor Plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Elevations A107 . 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. select A0 metric.Sections A108 . double-click A102 . Adding Views to Sheets | 149 .Layout Plan A104 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. for Name. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select the new sheet name.Elevations A105 . Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. you add views to these sheets.Floor Plan. and drag it to the sheet.rvt. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Design Bar.Stairs In the following exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 17 In the Project Browser.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. select Level 1.Elevations A106 . and click OK. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Save.rvt. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. and click OK. right-click. 2 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click to place the view. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Sheets (all).

Elevations. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet.The red border around the view no longer displays. 150 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. double-click A104 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click to place it. click Modify. and click to place it. align it with the East elevation. under Sheets (all). 8 On the Design Bar. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser.

16 Select title bar. Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. double-click A107 . click Modify. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. Adding Views to Sheets | 151 . and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. 12 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. and click to place it. select 1:5. for View Scale. and click to place it.Sections. under Sheets (all). 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). .Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog.

Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser.Stairs.NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. 19 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 152 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. zoom in to the grip. move the cursor over it. and press TAB until it highlights. 18 Under Floor Plans. under Sheets (all). Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. double-click A108 . click Modify. under Floor Plans.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you must first activate the view on the sheet.Sections. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. under Sheets (all). Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 153 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser.22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers.rvt. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. double-click A107 . In order to do this. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and then make changes and deactivate the view.

and click Deactivate View. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. 7 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. 154 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and press ENTER. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. click Modify. right-click. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. enter 16700 mm. 6 Right-click. 5 On the Design Bar.2 Select the building section view. double-click North. and click Activate View.

Click OK. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. After you create the sheet. click Camera.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click. You modify the view to hide the view title. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select the new sheet name. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. and click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. select A0 metric. The camera view displays.rvt. enter Title Sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 155 . 7 Place the camera as shown. enter T. under Floor Plans. For Sheet Name. and click Properties. double-click Level 1.

10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. enter 1500 mm. 156 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Under Extents. Under Camera. 13 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. under Sheets (all). select Far Clip Active. 12 On the View Control Bar. enter100000 mm. 14 Under 3D Views. for Eye Elevation. For Far Clip Offset.8 On the Options Bar. For Target Elevation. double-click T . click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 11 On the View Control Bar. enter 18000 mm.

15 With the view selected. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. Under Model Crop Size. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 157 . 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. . enter 635 mm. click Modify. select No. click Modify. 24 Click OK twice. and click OK. 19 Select the view on the sheet. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). click Duplicate. for Height. and then click OK. on the Options Bar. Click Apply. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. under Graphics. 22 In the Name dialog. for Show title. 25 On the Design Bar. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Size. enter Viewport/no title mark. and on the Options Bar.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file. 158 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Tagging and Scheduling 4 In this tutorial. in your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. 159 . such as room and window schedules. You also learn to create different types of schedules. such as doors and windows. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.

Because of the open style floor plan.Level 1. click Room Separation. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser.Tagging Objects In this lesson. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. expand Floor Plans.rvt. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. and click Room and Area. right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 160 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. click Training Files. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects.

and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing).4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. move the cursor to the right. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 161 . as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.

indicating that it can be edited. 9 In the Tags dialog. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and select the room tag. click OK. The room tag number displays in blue. click Training Files.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. click Modify. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 On the Design Bar. click Load.7 On the Design Bar. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 162 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room. 13 On the Options Bar. and click to place the room and tag. 11 In the Tags dialog. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged.

and press ENTER. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 163 . Click to place the new room and tag. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. 17 Click the room text label. 18 On the Design Bar. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. click it. enter U18-1. click Modify.16 Zoom in on the tag number. and press ENTER. enter Entry. click Room.

22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. enter Kitchen. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and press ENTER. click Modify. 164 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 21 Click the room text label. Dining. Sequential letters are also supported. 20 On the Design Bar. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet.

24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.rvt. and moving clockwise. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 26 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. The rooms are already placed. click Modify. expand Floor Plans. in the Project Browser. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. click Room Tag. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms.Level 1. Tagging Doors and Windows | 165 . Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. double-click Unit 18 Plan . Model Categories tab. expand Lines. you learn how to place door and window tags.Level 2. clear Room Separation.rvt. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. but they need to be tagged. under Floor Plans. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 28 On the Design Bar.

8 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. 166 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. click (Properties).2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. enter U18-2. and press ENTER. and click OK. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. enter U18-1. for Mark. under Identify Data.

under Category. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. and drag it down to center it in the doorway. 13 On the Design Bar. double-click Unit 18 Plan . and click OK.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. select Door Tags. Tagging Doors and Windows | 167 .Level 2. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. click Tag All Not Tagged. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

168 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Window. 19 In the Tags dialog. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Load. click Tag All Not Tagged.rfa. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. 21 Click OK. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. click Training Files.

click Tag ➤ By Category.rfa. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Training Files. Tagging Other Objects | 169 . Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. click Tag All Not Tagged. and modify the tag placement and display.Level 1. select Leader. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. and click OK. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 28 Select Window Tags. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 4 Select a dining room chair. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. 27 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 At the confirmation prompt. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. 25 Under Floor Plans.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.rvt. Zoom flyout. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. 26 On the View toolbar. click Yes to load a tag.

12 Click the elbow control. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. and on the Options Bar. clear Leader. 9 Click Modify. and drag it up to form an angled leader. 170 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 13 Optionally. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 14 Click Modify. 11 Select the tag for the table. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table.8 Select the furniture in the living room. and drag it above the chair tag. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1).

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). and on the Design Bar. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. click Modify. and click OK.Level 2. double-click Unit 18 Plan . under Floor Plans.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. click Tag All Not Tagged. 20 On the Options Bar. Tagging Other Objects | 171 . 18 On the Design Bar. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. select M_Furniture tag : Standard.

Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.21 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. 172 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. and click Modify. select Furniture Tags. 22 In the Type Selector. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. click Check None. you learn to add schedules. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Next. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. Creating a Window Schedule | 173 . that is. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. Finally. in which windows are listed by window type. click Training Files. a schedule that lists every window in the building. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

6 Under Available fields. and double-click Level 1. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. and click OK. select Comments and click Add. 7 Using the same method. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. 4 For Name. right-click in the Design Bar. 174 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand Floor Plans. 9 Click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Windows. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. under Category. enter Building Window Schedule.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. and click View.

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. However. under Other. right-click the schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities. Creating a Window Schedule | 175 . 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. for Sort by. 13 In the Project Browser. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. If no open view shows the selected element. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. click Close. in large building models with many views. for Sorting/Grouping. click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. this can be a time-consuming process. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. select Type Mark. NOTE By clicking Show. and click OK twice. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. and click View Properties. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. you are prompted to open one that does. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. click Show. and on the Options Bar.

under Other. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. and click View Properties. double-click Level 2. for Sorting/Grouping. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. sorted by type mark. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. The window type schedule is displayed. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. clear Itemize every instance. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. 22 Click OK twice. 176 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.The window schedule is displayed. under Floor Plans.

In this case. select Construction. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. expand Schedules/Quantities. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. click Add to create the new parameter. and double-click Building Window Schedule. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. you cannot use them to tag objects. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. unlike shared parameters. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 5 Click OK. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. enter Head Detail.rvt.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. Under Parameter Data. click OK. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rvt. jamb. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. For Discipline. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. For Group parameter under. and sill conditions for a window can be found. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 177 . select Type. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. for Name.

enter Window Details. right-click Building Window Schedule. select Head Detail. under Other. so that they are listed before Comments. for Fields. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and while pressing the left mouse button. TIP To select all 3 headers. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Available fields. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. click in the Head Detail header. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. 14 On the Options Bar. click Group. 178 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Jamb Detail. select the following fields. and Sill Detail. and click Properties. click Edit.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. 12 Click OK twice.

Under Name. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans.Door Schedule. 4 Click OK.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. and for Sill Detail. enter 2/A107. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit.Level 1. enter 1/A107.rvt. For example. enter Unit 18 . 6 Under Available fields. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. for Jamb Detail. Select contains in the second field. for Head Detail. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Enter U18 in the third field. click the Fields tab. You then hide the column used for the filter. Verify the Phase is Phase 1. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 179 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select the following fields. select Doors. Verify Schedule building components is selected. enter 3/A107. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. click Schedule/Quantities. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. under Type Mark A.

180 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . expand Sheets (all). 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet.Unit 18. 10 Under Fields.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.Door Schedule. but is not included as a column in the schedule. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. and drag it to the sheet. click Unit 18 . select Family and Type. select Hidden Field. 13 In the Project Browser. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. 9 Click the Formatting tab. select Mark. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 11 Under Field formatting. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. and click OK. and double-click A102 .

right-click in the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. 5 Using the same method.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. under Category. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. 7 To the right of Header text. double-click Level 1. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan.rvt. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. under Floor Plans. select Number. and click Add. 19 On the Design Bar. and click View. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Rooms. Creating a Room Schedule | 181 . TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. and click OK. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. 8 Click OK. click Modify. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building.

Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. add 5 more rooms. select Storage. enter Storage. for Name. enter Corridor. For 105. and press ENTER. for room 101. For 102. and press ENTER.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The room Number is U17-9. 11 Using the same method. and press ENTER. click New. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 103. select Corridor. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. 182 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . For 104. 101-106. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. 10 Edit the number to be 101. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. enter Building Entry. next to Rows.

click Room Separation.■ For 106. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the Line Graphics dialog. click the Lines field. and click OK. expand Lines. For Weight. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In the Lines field. under Projection/Surface. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 183 . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1. For Room Separation. enter Stair. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. and modify room names. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. select 9. Under Custom colors. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. click Override. and press ENTER. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. you add room separation lines. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. click the Color field. place rooms from a program list. click the bright green swatch.rvt.

184 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 8 On the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar. draw the horizontal line. click Modify. click Room. First. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor.

10 On the Options Bar. for Room. 13 For Offset.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. select 102 Storage. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right). enter 2400 mm. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 185 . select 101 Building Entry. 12 On the Options Bar. for Room.

These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. click Modify. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Room Schedule. 18 In the Project Browser. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. 16 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 186 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. under Floor Plans. and zoom in to the Corridor. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 106 in the space with the stairs.

click New to add a new row. under Constraints. 22 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter As Selected. enter Units. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. select Rooms. under Category. select Base Finish. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. Floor Finish. 29 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and for all 3 finishes. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. and Wall Finish. click Schedule/Quantities. under Available fields. and click OK. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add. double-click Room Schedule.19 While pressing CTRL. 26 Select Schedule keys. 30 For Key Name. while pressing CTRL. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 187 . Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. click (Properties). and click OK. clear Room Bounding. 23 In the Project Browser. The Room Style Schedule displays without data.

35 Click OK twice. click Zoom To Fit. double-click Room Schedule. 39 On the View toolbar. 32 In the Project Browser. under Other. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. for Fields. and click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. and click Add. for Available fields. Zoom flyout. 41 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Room Style. click Check None. 188 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room Style. 36 In the Project Browser. select Units. click (Filter Selection). 42 In the Filter dialog.31 Using the same method. select Rooms. right-click Room Schedule. and click Properties. under Schedules/Quantities. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 37 Under U17-8. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. click Edit.

select Units. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. click (Properties). expand Floor Plans. 103. under Views (all). select Room Style. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). under Floor Plans. select Room Type. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. 45 In the Project Browser. 8 Click OK. For rooms 102 and 105. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 104. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. and double-click Level 1. click OK.rvt. double-click Room Schedule. right-click Level 1. click (Duplicate). Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. and apply it to the Level 1 view. enter Room Type. 5 For Title. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. for Name. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Public. under Identity Data. for Room Style. and click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. click the Color Scheme field. and click OK.43 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click Properties. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 189 . Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. enter Room Type. at the warning prompt. 6 For Color. and click OK. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and 106. select Service.

select blue.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Custom color. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). clear Visible. 22 In the Color dialog. expand Lines. and click OK twice. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 18 On the Options Bar. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. select the color legend. click the value in the Color column. and clear Room Separation. click Color Scheme Legend. and click OK. 190 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Foreground. 16 On the Design Bar. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. click Edit Color Scheme. click Edit. for Display Color Fill in. click Modify.

24 Click OK. for Size. and click OK twice. for Swatch Width. enter 5 mm. 28 Under Title Text. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 191 .23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. on the Options Bar. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. (Properties). under Graphics. enter 25 mm.

You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. 192 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click {3D}. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.29 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. under 3D Views.rvt. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.

9 Using the same method. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Material: Area. click Modify. select Roofs. Creating a Material Takeoff | 193 . For Then by. 12 Click OK. click Family and Type. Under Field formatting. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. Select Grand totals.Insulation on Plywood Deck . The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. 4 In the Type Selector. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. under Available fields. Clear Itemize every instance. select Calculate totals.EPDM. select Family and Type. 5 On the Design Bar. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. under Category. 11 Click the Formatting tab. select Material: Description. and click OK. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click Add. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields.3 While pressing CTRL.

The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. for Fields. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. under Available fields. for the Material: Cost field. 22 For Field formatting.80 5. 23 In the Material Takeoff. and click Add.40 50. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. select Calculate totals. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 194 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Properties. and click OK twice.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. for Name. and under Fields. click Edit. 17 Click Calculated Value. enter Estimated Cost. and click Properties. click Estimated Cost. 24 In the Project Browser. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 19 For Formula. under Other. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). click Material: Cost. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 21 Click the Formatting tab. 20 Click OK.

select Fixed. You draw a travel path line. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. creating a generic tag to tag the family. 27 Click Field Format. for Formatting. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson.25 In the Element Properties dialog. tag the line. and are defined and stored in an external file. regardless of category. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. click Training Files. you create a shared parameter file. click Edit. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. adding the shared parameters to a family. For Rounding. These shared parameters can be added to any family. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 195 . click Estimated Cost. and reporting the shared parameters. and schedule the total distance of each path. In this lesson. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create an exiting plan for the building. select 2 decimal places. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. ensuring consistency across families and projects. 28 Click OK 3 times. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. For Units. under Fields. either within family components or within the project template.rvt.

for Type of Parameter. select Length. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 196 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. enter Travel Distance. click Create. 11 Click OK. for Name. click New. click Training Files. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. for Name. and click Save. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 7 Under Parameters. under Groups. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click New. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. enter Exiting. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. and click OK. for Name.rvt.rvt. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. enter Path ID. for File name.txt. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click New. and click OK. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Floor Plans. 9 Under Parameters. and click OK. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog.

enter Length. and select Instance. under Parameters. 11 In the Family Types dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category.rfa. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 3 On the Design Bar. otherwise the family loads into the current project. and click Select. 8 Select Instance. following the equals symbol (=). verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. group it under Dimensions. 12 Click Apply. click Load into Projects. click Add. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Add. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 197 . and click OK. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. 7 For Group parameter under. for Travel Distance Formula. 9 In the Family Types dialog.rvt. and click OK. select Shared parameter. and click OK. under Dimensions. 14 If necessary. select Constraints. in the Load into Projects dialog. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 13 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. Click Training Files. If you have multiple projects open. click Family Types.

click Label. select Travel Distance. under Parameters. 19 On the Design Bar. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click Select. and click OK 3 times. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rft. and click Open.rft. click Label. 17 Select Generic Tag.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 On the Design Bar. 198 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. click Modify. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Add. 24 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.

29 Click File ➤ Save As.rvt is selected. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID.Tagging. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window. Placing. under Floor Plans. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. and click OK. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save.Level 1. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. click Load into Projects. After the lines are tagged. select Path ID. Placing. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. and move it down. and press DELETE. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.Tagging.27 In the drawing window. 30 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. double-click Exiting Plan . verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 31 On the Design Bar. enter M_Travel Distance Tag.rfa.rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. for File Name. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 199 .

200 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .2 Zoom in to the corridor. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. above the exterior door as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor to the right. select Chain. and click in the center of the corridor.

through the door. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Constraints. click Component. 10 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. and click OK. and click outside of the building.Level 2. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 201 . 17 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Placing. enter 1-1. verify that Chain is selected. 8 On the Design Bar. double click Exiting Plan . under Floor Plans.7 Move the cursor down.Tagging. click Modify. click Modify. for Path ID. 13 While pressing CTRL. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. and click (Properties). 12 On the Design Bar.

18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. and click. and click above the door to the stair. 19 Move the cursor up through the door. move the cursor to the left. move the cursor near the right corner. click Component. 202 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 20 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. 22 Click at the center starting point. click Modify. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown.

Placing.Tagging. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Constraints. (Properties). and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 2-1. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. click Modify. and click in the stair. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. and click OK. click Modify. 28 While pressing CTRL. click Tag ➤ By Category. 27 On the Design Bar. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 203 . 33 For Name. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. for Path ID. enter Level 1 Exit Distance.23 Move the cursor down. under Category.

in the first field. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Schedule/Quantities. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 36 For Filter by. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. 46 In the Project Browser. and click OK. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select Path ID and Travel Distance. for Filter. 42 Click OK. and click Properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. select Calculate Totals. 35 Click the Filter tab. and under Field formatting. enter 1-. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 44 In the Project Browser. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. enter 2-. for Filter by. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. select Travel Distance. 38 For Sort by.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. while pressing CTRL. and in the third field. 43 In the Project Browser. select Path ID. select Path ID. in the third field. and click Add. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 204 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. under Available fields. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click View. and click Rename. in the second field. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click Edit. right-click the Design Bar. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 41 Under Fields. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK twice. select contains.

7 In the Type Properties dialog. click the Fields tab.Partitions . 4 Under Available fields. under Categories.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Fixed Partitions. select Walls. and click the browse button. and click Properties. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 205 .152 mm. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. click the Value field. and click OK twice.Interiors\C10 . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.2 In the New Schedules dialog. expand C . and click OK. click C1010145 . right-click Generic . for Assembly Code. select the following fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall.

tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. click the File Data Source tab. under Database Name. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 6 Click Finish. 10 When the confirmation displays. select a location for the database file. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). enter Revit_Project. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 206 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .mdb for Database Name. click OK. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. 8 In the New Database dialog. 1 On the File menu. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 Under Directories. click Training Files. and click OK to create the database.9 In the schedule. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. 3 Click New. Additionally. and click Next. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 10 Close the exercise file.rvt. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click Create. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. and click Next. and open the database in Microsoft Access. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Database. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. click OK in the dialog.

For example. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 207 . The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. in addition to the Id column. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. 13 Close the exercise file. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.

208 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

209 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.Annotating and Dimensioning 5 In this tutorial.

You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 210 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. click Training Files. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Relocating a Project | 211 .Relocating a Project In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m.

212 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. Under Constraints. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. click (Properties). select Shared. The levels in the project are not shared. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Edit/New. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (all). 6 Click OK twice. 10 On the View menu. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. enter8 mm Head . Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. However. 8 Select the Level 1 line.Shared Elevation. In the Name dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. enter 10000 mm. If you did that now. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. and press ENTER. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. and double-click South.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. By selecting the Level 1 line. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. The south elevation is displayed. and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. for Elevation Base. By entering 10000 mm in this step. you specify the new location of the project. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate.

Shared Elevation. as well as other views of the building model. under Elevations. 14 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. double-click North.Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. Relocating a Project | 213 . select Level : 8 mm Head . 12 In the Type Selector.

the Penthouse level. click Modify. and select Levels 2-4. and the Roof Plan level. 214 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Level : 8 mm Head . All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.Shared Elevation. In the Type Selector.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. On the Design Bar.

you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. radial. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. In Revit Architecture. multi-segmented. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. click File menu ➤ Save As. “Dimensioning” on page 215. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. and double-click Level 1. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Dimensioning | 215 . there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent.16 If you want to save your changes. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. and angular dimensions. and save the exercise file with a unique name. You place linear. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Dimensioning In this lesson.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). permanent dimensions are created automatically. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. expand Floor Plans. In this case.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. 216 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. dimensions are aligned. select it. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. By default. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. click Dimension. snap to wall centerlines. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. select it. and are created by selecting individual reference points.

7 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension.5 Move the cursor above the view. click Modify. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Creating Dimensions | 217 . Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. The lock displays as locked.

but below the first dimension that you placed.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. 17 Move the cursor up. select Wall Faces. above the plan view of the building. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. 218 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and select its left exterior face. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. 11 Using the same method. 12 13 On the Options Bar. 15 Move the cursor to the right. for Prefer. select the right endpoint of the planter. and select it. select the right side of the curtain wall. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. click Modify. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial).19 On the Basics tab. select Wall faces. click Dimension. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. 26 Select the radial dimension. and select it. For Prefer. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. Creating Dimensions | 219 . 21 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and specify a point to place the dimension.

click Modify. click Dimension. For Prefer. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). and click OK. 220 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Select the horizontal line. Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. on the Options Bar. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.28 With the dimension still selected. verify Wall faces is selected. 30 On the Basics tab. for Suffix. click (Properties). enter Typ..

35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. and click to place the dimension. 37 On the Basics tab. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. you select only the wall.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 221. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 221 . 38 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. When you dimension the wall.

rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. Click OK. For Pick. select Openings. 222 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Entire Walls. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 3. Click Options. expand Views (all). and select Widths. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References. click Dimension. select Wall centerlines.

you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. for a multi-segmented dimension. in some cases. click Modify. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. 7 On the Basics tab. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 223. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. For example. However. expand Floor Plans. and click to place the automatic dimension string. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. expand Views (all). and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. and double-click Level 1. When you place dimensions. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. Controlling Witness Lines | 223 .Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions.

and select it. select Individual References. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. 7 Using the same method. and click to place the dimension. For Pick. move the cursor down. 224 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify Wall centerlines is selected. select the right edge of the planter. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. click Dimension. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights.

11 Move the cursor down. select the bottom right endpoint. 10 Using the same method. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. and specify a point to place the dimension. and select it.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. Controlling Witness Lines | 225 .

18 Press and hold SHIFT. and when the wall centerline highlights. select Wall centerlines. for Prefer. click Modify. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. select it. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. 226 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. and drag the dimension down the wall. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed.

23 Proceed to the next exercise. and using the same methods. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 227 . and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 20 Release SHIFT. click Modify. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style.19 Release SHIFT. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. After you create the new family type. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. 22 On the Basics tab. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 227.

text font. select CityBlueprint.2 mm. and select the lower dimension. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 228 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. click Edit/New. select Arrow 30 Degree. 2 Click (Properties). for Text Size. For Text Font. enter Office Standard. and click OK.dimension tick mark. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Under Text. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 5 In the Name dialog. for Tick Mark. enter 3.

9 In the Type Selector. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 7 On the Basics tab. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 229 . click Modify. and select the bottom dimension. click Modify. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. select another font. 10 On the Basics tab. ■ Click OK twice.

create a new angular dimension type. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 230. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. select the angular dimension on the planter. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. 230 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. and modify it to use the office standard parameters.11 Using the same method. and how to add leaders to the text notes.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. but below the upper dimension string.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. click (None). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 231 . you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. click Text.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. and click and drag to create a text box. for Leader. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. zoom to planter near grid line 5.

5 In the text box. and click OK. 10 In the Name dialog box. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. click Duplicate. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. click Edit/New. select Arc Leaders. If so. enter 6 mm. under Graphics. and click OK. and click . click Modify. 7 Select the text box. enter EXISTING BUILDING. and click OK. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. 232 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Text Size. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. 11 Under Text. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Text. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 233 . and enter Planting Bed. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box.

In the Rename dialog. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 24 On the Design Bar. enter Standard Notes. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. click Modify. for New. click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Modify.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). 20 On the Design Bar. select Arrow 30 Degree. and click OK. 234 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . Click OK twice. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. Under Graphics. for Leader Arrowhead. Under Text. select CityBlueprint. Click Rename. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. for Text font.

click to place the text box. select Text: Standard Notes. for Leader. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 235 . 27 On the Options Bar. click Text.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. click (Arc). 26 In the Type Selector. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. over the Planting Bed text.

32 If you want to save your changes. and enter 457 mm Conc. Wall. and save the exercise file with a unique name.31 Click in the text box. click File menu ➤ Save As. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 236 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail.Detailing 6 In this tutorial. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2008. These components display at the required scale. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. like a standard door header condition. and metal studs. plywood. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. 237 . You can detail directly in a view of the building information model.

you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. click Training Files. you trace over the building model geometry. Detailing the View In this exercise.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the callout view. You load detail components. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. as well as detail lines. 238 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you detail the view of the roof edge. They are also view specific. In order to detail from the building model. After you add components. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. which means that all detail components. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view.rvt. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. and insulation objects. add detail components. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. region objects. that you add to the view are visible only in this view.

select As underlay. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 13 In the Name dialog. and click OK.rfa. The roof overhang detail displays. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 8 Delete the component. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Open.5mm. click Duplicate. double-click the detail callout head. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Edit/New. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. Exact location is not important. 5 In the alert dialog. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 406. 10 On the Options Bar. click Repeating Detail. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. 17 In the drawing area. 16 Click OK twice. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Corrugated Metal. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click . click Training Files. 15 For Spacing. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. Detailing the View | 239 . and click OK.

21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component. ■ Click Modify. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. click Load. 240 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and on the Edit toolbar. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. and press DELETE. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click Detail Component. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. click (Move). 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 23 On the Options Bar.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail.

24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. Because you still have several components to load. click Training Files.rfa. 25 In the Type Selector. press SPACEBAR 3 times. click Detail Component. 31 In the Type Selector. you load them as a group from a single file.rvt. 30 On the Design Bar. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click OK. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. click Training Files. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. 34 In the Type Selector. and click Open. and place it in the detail view as shown. 32 To properly orient the component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. and click Open. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. Detailing the View | 241 .

Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. click Insulation. 36 On the Options Bar. click the Flip instance arrows. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown. 242 | Chapter 6 Detailing . The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. 39 Select the horizontal segment. select Chain. and click Modify. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 38 Click Modify.

select to near side. enter 140mm. 43 Click Modify. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. ■ Click Modify. click (Move). as shown. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. 46 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar. For Offset. Detailing the View | 243 . select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. click Detail Component. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.

49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. meaning they display only in this view. you add lines to your detail. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component.48 In the Type Selector. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 244. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. and lock the component. 52 Click Modify. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. 244 | Chapter 6 Detailing . select Thin Lines. Like detail components. click Detail Lines. as shown. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 4 Click Modify. 2 In the Type Selector.rvt. they are view specific. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm.

11 In the Type Selector. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 10 On the Design Bar. as shown. Adding Detail Lines | 245 . Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. enter 10mm. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. For Offset. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. select Thin Lines. select Medium Lines. enter 10mm.Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. For Offset. as shown. click Detail Lines. 7 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines.

click (Draw). 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 16 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. draw the detail lines as shown. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. and clear Chain. and draw the detail lines as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. select Chain. as shown. 246 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

and click Properties. and click OK. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. select the Penthouse level line. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. 22 In the Project Browser. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click Roof Overhang Detail.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. For Offset. select Do not display. When you turn the display model off. enter 10mm. 26 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines | 247 . select Vapor Barrier. 24 On the View Control Bar. right-click. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment.

248 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 30 In the Type Selector. you add text notes to complete the detail. select M_Break Line.29 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 32 Click Modify. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. click Text. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. “Adding Text Notes” on page 248. press SPACEBAR as necessary.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. click Detail Component.

enter Typ. Adding Text Notes | 249 . Enter the text.2 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 7 Select the dimension line.. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click (Arc) to create an arced leader. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. for Text ➤ Suffix. and click (Properties). 6 Click Modify. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. Click again to specify the location of the text box. click Dimension.

250 | Chapter 6 Detailing .9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and press DELETE. click Roof Overhang Detail. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). enter Roof Overhang Detail . and selecting the chain. select all the coping linework. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click Select All Instances. click 6 In the Filter dialog. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. “Creating Detail Components” on page 250. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. right-click. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. on the Options Bar. and save the exercise file. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 7 Click Modify. right-click. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. select a text note. and click Rename.Keynotes. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. (Filter Selection).rvt. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. while pressing CTRL. right-click. pressing TAB. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. and click OK. clear Detail Items and Dimensions.

22 Click Modify. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click it in the Project Browser. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click Modify. for File name. While pressing SHIFT. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. enter Roof Edge. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 21 To place the component. select the coping. 25 In the Filter dialog.rft. click . click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. select Medium Lines. 23 Using a window. clear Detail Items. and click OK. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. Creating Detail Components | 251 . and the component can be placed in the detail. click Detail Component. 15 Use a window to select all linework. and click Save. 24 On the Options Bar. navigate to your preferred location. in the Type Selector. 18 In the Save As dialog. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. click Training Files. click Load into Projects.Keynotes view is not the open view. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . The original linework remains selected. 14 Click Modify.

30 In the drawing area. 63mm Rigid Insulation. 27 On the Design Bar. and click Open. Click to place the leader arm. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. “Adding Keynotes” on page 252. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project.26 Press DELETE. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing.rvt. click Detail Component. 252 | Chapter 6 Detailing . In the Keynotes dialog. 2 In the alert dialog. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click Training Files. and click OK. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. 28 On the Options Bar. delete the underlying linework. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 31 Using the same method used previously. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.B5. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. click Keynote ➤ Element. and click Open. click Load.rfa. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. you place keynotes on objects. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

6 Click Modify. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.F1. select the metal fascia with drip edge. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. navigate to 07645. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.D1. 12 On the Design Bar. use keynote 07645. FasciaProfile_1. use keynote 09250.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. 10 In the Keynotes dialog.G1. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. Roof Edge4.D11.C1. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. use keynote 06110. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300.F1.D11. use keynote 06110. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. use keynote 06160. click in the Value column. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. For the 50 x 150.I1. Adding Keynotes | 253 . use keynote 06110. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. click Keynote ➤ Element. 11 Click OK 3 times. use keynote 06160. For the metal coping. 19mm Plywood. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties). For the 50 x 200.

and click Modify. using keynote 07460. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. 6 Lock the line. select Corrugated Metal. 22mm Corrugated Steel . 17 Keynote the component.rft. You do this in order to keynote the component. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog.rvt. click Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location. for File name. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 254. select Medium Lines. and click Open. click Lines. select the left end point of the reference line. 4 In the Type Selector. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Save. 5 In the drawing area. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As.20 Ga. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. click Load into Projects. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Training Files. 18 Save the file. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown.14 On the Design Bar. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.A8. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 15 In the Type Selector. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. and select the right end point. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Save As dialog. 254 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

23 In the left pane of the Open dialog.A1. click Detail Component. click Load. click Duplicate. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 28 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Name dialog. 34 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Properties).11 Press DELETE. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 16 Select the component. click Edit/New. 20 Click OK 3 times. 31 Select the component. invisible. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 255 . click Detail Component. and click Open. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the drawing area. and m_Light Line Detail Component. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 30 Click Modify. and click OK. 15 Click Modify. and hidden) used in the view. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. click in the Value column. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 37 Click OK 3 times. 25 Next. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 22 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. You add the components to the project and keynote them. and click . enter EPDM Membrane. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click the end points at the top of the roof. select Medium Line Detail Component. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. select m_Light Line Detail Component. click Edit/New. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. click Duplicate. 24 While pressing CTRL. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Detail Component.

on the Edit toolbar. 53 On the Options Bar. against the 3/4" plywood. 256 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 48 Using the same method used previously. and click . 52 In the Type Selector. and click the lower end at the break line. name the component Air Barrier. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 46 Click Modify. select Chain. click Detail Component. click Detail Component. 40 Click Modify. 49 With the component selected. 47 Select the component.G1. click Detail Component. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. and click . 44 On the Design Bar. (Move). and assign it keynote 07260. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 41 Select the component just added. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 42 Using the same method used previously.A5. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. and assign it keynote 06110. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail.38 On the Design Bar. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang.

name the component Vapor Barrier. and Vapor Barrier. 61 In the drawing area. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. click Keynote ➤ Element. 60 On the Design Bar.A4.55 Click Modify. leaving the detail component lines. 58 Using the method used previously. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 50 x 200 Framing. Air Barrier. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 257 . and click . and assign it keynote 07260. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.

71 Save the file. and close the text editor. and assign it keynote 07210. 258 | Chapter 6 Detailing .txt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 69 Using the method used previously. 67 In the drawing area. and click . name the component Batt Insul. 3 In the text editor. select the component.. 72 Proceed to the next exercise.A4. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. in the Type Selector. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.A9. 63 In the drawing area. 68 Select the component. and press TAB. click Detail Component. click Load into Projects.rfa. 70 In the drawing area. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and press TAB.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. and press ENTER. Enter 07463.rvt. add a keynote for the component. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise.A1. Enter 07460. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 258. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. click File menu ➤ Save. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. The database file opens in a text editor. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. select Invisible Lines.

You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. click to place the leader. These details do not update with changes to the building model. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. select Absolute. under Keynote Table.A1. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. and click OK. and click OK. 14 Save the file. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. click Keynote ➤ Element. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. you learn how to create a drafted detail. under Path Type. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. and click Open. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. click Browse. 9 In the drawing area. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. select all the keynotes. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. navigate to 07463.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. Each keynote displays as a simple number. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 13 Click Modify. 11 Click Modify. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. In the Type Selector. and click to place the note. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting.txt. Creating a Drafted Detail | 259 . After you create a drafting view. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang).

and click Rename.rvt. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 260 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 7 In the Rename View dialog. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The detail is imported as an import symbol. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. select 1 : 5. select Reference other view. The detail that you import is in DWG format. for Scale.rvt. and click OK. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. select Center-to-center. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 260.dwg. right-click Drafting 1. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Click Open. For Layer/Level Colors. click Training Files. enter EPDM Metal Coping. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Black and white. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). click Callout. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. 6 In the Project Browser.

and double-click the callout. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the callout.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. for New. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. click Rename. 10 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. click Modify. click Edit/New. 5 Click Modify. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. delete the existing value. and click Properties. Creating a Reference Callout | 261 . Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. and use the callout grips to move the callout head.No Reference. 12 Click OK twice. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Detail . The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.

3 On the View Control Bar. 18 Save the file.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail.Elev. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser.No Reference). There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. enter Header @ Sliding Door. 262 | Chapter 6 Detailing . for Name. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). The callout is updated with the sheet information. double-click A105 . drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. “Creating a Detail in a Drafting View” on page 262 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise./Det. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail ./Sect. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.

enter Gyp. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Type Selector. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 17 Click Modify. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. click Region Properties.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. select Wide Lines. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Draw a rectangle as shown. select Gypsum-Plaster. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 263 . and enter 20. 19 In the Type Selector. click Filled Region. click Detail Component. 11 In the Name dialog. . Board. select the width dimension. click Duplicate.5mm. 14 Click OK 3 times. click . 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. for Name. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 18 While pressing CTRL. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 16 Select the left edge of the region. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar.

and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point.20 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. 264 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 24 Select the mirrored region. click 22 On the Options Bar. and click above the top of the region as the end point. click Finish Sketch. Move the cursor up. (Draw).

27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.Finish.25 Click Modify. click . 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. Draw a rectangle as shown. . click Edit/New. 30 In the Name dialog. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 265 . click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK. select Medium Lines. enter Wood . in the Type Selector. and select the right edge of the wood region. 33 Click OK 3 times. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point.Finish. click Region Properties. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. verify that the thickness is 19mm. select Wood . 37 On the Design Bar. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click (Align).

46 On the Tools toolbar. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 40 On the Options Bar. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick). click Finish Sketch. click Ref Plane. click . click Filled Region. enter 6mm. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 266 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click (Align). For Offset.5mm. and press ENTER. sketch the new region as shown. select Medium Lines. 42 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector.38 On the Design Bar.

Move the cursor down 305mm. enter 10mm. and press ENTER. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw). Move the cursor right 25mm. click Finish Sketch. 56 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 267 . and select the bottom horizontal line. 48 Click Modify. and click to select the point.47 Click the reference plane. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. click (Trim/Extend). For Offset. and click to select the point. and click to select the point. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. enter 0. Select Chain. 54 On the Tools toolbar. click Filled Region. Move the cursor left 25mm. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. and press ENTER.

67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. and click Open. 58 In the Type Selector. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. select the height dimension. For Offset. select Medium Lines.Add mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. enter 3mm. click Load. click Detail Lines. 62 Select the left detail line. top. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. 268 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 65 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. and right edges of the door panel region. 60 Select the left. enter 76. 61 Click Modify. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa.2mm. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Training Files.

click Load. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150.TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 269 . select Wide Lines. click Training Files. 76 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 71 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. and click Open. 74 Select the expansion bolt.rfa. use the images as a guide. click Detail Lines. 70 On the Design Bar. 69 Select the bolt. 68 Click Modify. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

84 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 270 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 79 In the Type Selector. click . 85 On the Options Bar. 82 Select the rectangle. click Detail Lines.78 On the Design Bar. 80 On the Options Bar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. click . (Mirror). 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. select Thin Lines. and on the Edit toolbar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.

89 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 271 . as shown. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown.87 Click Modify. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 90 In the Type Selector. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines.

and press ENTER.92 Select the line. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 272 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click Detail Lines. 94 Select the mirrored line on the right. click (Mirror). and click to place the arc as shown. enter 3mm. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 95 On the Design Bar. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. click . and on the Edit toolbar. 97 On the Options Bar. select the length dimension.

101 On the Design Bar.99 Click Modify. 102 In the Type Selector. and click Modify. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 273 . select M_Break Line. Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 105 In the drawing area. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. click Detail Component. 106 Click to place the dimension. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 103 Add two break lines as shown. click Dimension.

116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. and click Modify. 274 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 113 In the drawing area. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. click to create an arced leader. click Text. 114 Enter Gyp. and on the Options Bar. select the gypsum board region on the left. using the Drag Text grip. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 112 In the Options Bar. 115 Select the note. 108 In the Type Selector.5mm Arial. 110 Select the dimension line. and click Modify. click Dimension. drag the text for the smaller dimension. Add text notes to complete the detail 111 On the Design Bar. and click to place the text.107 On the Design Bar. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. Board.

click Modify to end the command. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 275 . 118 On the Design Bar.117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 119 Save the file.

276 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

Finishing the Sheets 7 In this tutorial. such as images and text into project sheets ■ ■ ■ 277 . including: ■ ■ Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation.

5 On the Options Bar.Finishing-Sheets. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.Using Note Blocks In this lesson. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. 278 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . enter 1. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and double-click East.Hexagon. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Number of Leaders. click Modify. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats.rfa. 7 On the Design Bar. click Symbol. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote .

for Text. and click OK. click (Copy). under Identity Data. on the Options Bar. 12 On the Edit toolbar. and click above the tag to place a copy. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Properties). 13 Select the tag.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. enter Seal existing doors and insulate. Creating a Note Block | 279 .

and on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar.14 With the copy selected. and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. enter B. and click. 16 For Tag. 280 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 17 Click OK. 20 Select the tag on the left. 19 On the toolbar. click (Properties). clear Copy. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image. enter Repair existing door surround. 15 For Text. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. click (Mirror).

and click Add. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Repair existing door surround. for Note block name. Select Text. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. using the table as a reference. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean exterior brick wall.21 On the Design Bar. Tuckpoint as required. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. and click Add. Remove all existing windows. 22 Optionally. and moving counter-clockwise. for Sort by. under Available fields. select Tag. Clean cut and repair wall as required. Create. format. select Tag. click Modify. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Creating a Note Block | 281 . Repair as required. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Saw cut existing brick wall. and click OK. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. enter Exterior Construction Notes.

27 In the column header (text).rvt. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. select Exterior Construction Notes. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. and click Save. 26 Click OK. 28 In the Project Browser. and double-click A103 .Elevations. expand Sheets (all). 31 On the Design Bar. On the Appearance tab. and drag it to the sheet. 29 In the Project Browser. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet. expand Schedules/Quantities. For Header text. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. enter Mark. and for Alignment. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. select Center. enter 6 mm in the second field. enter Description.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. 282 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. and select Bold. for Heading. verify Arial in the first field.

■ 4 Click OK. Select Sheet Name. select Sheet Number. enter Sheet Index. select Sheet Number.Title Sheet. 5 In the list title field. and in the third field. 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). and click Add. select does not equal. under Available fields. On the Filter tab. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. for Filter by. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.Title Sheet. and click Add. under Sheets (all). Using Drawing Lists | 283 . double-click T . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. enter T. in the second field. and drag it to the sheet. 2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. select Sheet Index. select Sheet Number.Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. in the first field. 7 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. for Sort by. double-click T . 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.rvt. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. expand Schedules/Quantities. The drawing list displays.

Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. and click OK. and door frames. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. 284 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 9 On the Design Bar.8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. On construction documents. and so on). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. for Name. On construction documents. click Modify.rvt. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. doors. Finally. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. door frame schedule. windows. click New ➤ Legend. enter Typical Symbol Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog.

You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. enter 3mm. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 9 For Text Font.Filled Level Head . 13 Working from the top down. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. 10 For Text Size. click Duplicate. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 6 On the Options bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a text type with the necessary size.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. select Arial. for Name. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Creating a Symbol Legend | 285 . click Text. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . click .Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . enter Legend Text. and click OK. click Symbol. click Edit/New.

18 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. 17 On the Design Bar.Site Plan/Floor Plan. 19 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend. and double-click A101 . double-click A102 . under Sheets. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet.Unit 18. click Modify. 286 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . expand Sheets (all). select Viewport : No Titlemark.■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 15 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Selector. and click to place it. click Typical Symbol Legend. expand Legends. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet.

6 On the View Control Bar. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. and click OK. select1 : 50. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. click New ➤ Legend. 3 For Scale. For Host length. select Medium for Detail Level.rvt. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Legend Component. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.20 In the Type Selector. 21 On the Design Bar. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 5 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Section. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. enter 900 mm. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. and press ENTER. For View. Creating a Component Legend | 287 . you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. for Name. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. click Modify.

for Family. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. 10 Select the second wall. 12 In the Type Selector. 288 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.9 On the Design Bar. click Text. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and on the Options Bar.

14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. for Leader. pressing ENTER between component descriptions.13 On the Options Bar. click to add text without a leader. Creating a Component Legend | 289 . 19 Enter the following text. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click to add text with a single-segment leader.

24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 23 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the new sheet. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. right-click Sheets (all). The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 29 In the project Browser.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Design Bar. drag it onto the sheet. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. under Floor Plans. select Level 4. and click New Sheet. 290 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 25 In the Project Browser. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. under Legends. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. under Floor Plans. The open drawings are both visible. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select 4th Floor Wall Types. double-click Level 4. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet.

click (Match Type). enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. indicating that it captured the wall type properties.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 33 In the floor plan view. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. Creating a Component Legend | 291 . select the Wall Type 2 component. 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall.

36 On the View Control Bar. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. contractor inquiries.35 Select the patio divider wall. 37 Optionally. These changes can be due to owner requests. select Medium for Detail Level. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. 292 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. You can create a sequence of revisions.

click Revisions. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review.unanticipated changes in construction conditions. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared.rvt. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. Setting Up a Revision Table | 293 . 5 For Description. double-click Level 4. In general. When you use this option. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. the revision is locked and issued to the field. If Visible is not selected. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. enter a date. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. If you select By Sheet. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. yet as concise as possible. Using the table. 2 On the Settings menu. or changes in building material availability. When Issued is selected. under Floor Plans. For example. In most instances. 7 Under Visible. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. if the active revision is number 1. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. 3 In the Revisions dialog.

2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. click (Move). but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. move the cursor up. including revision number and revision date. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. you make changes to the project floor plan.8 Click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 5 Select the partition. 4 On the Edit toolbar. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 4. 294 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 Select the divider. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project.

click Finish Sketch. click Revision Cloud.6 On the Design Bar. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. Sketching Revision Clouds | 295 . Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. click near the partition you moved. 11 On the Design Bar. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Modify. 8 In the drawing area. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.

Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. click the Annotation Objects tab. under Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. select 6. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Click OK. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. you load a revision tag into the project. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. click Tag ➤ By Category. 296 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . for Line Weight. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Level 4. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

11 Click to place the tag. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table.rfa. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. Because you chose to number by project. you create a sheet view in your project. you prevent further changes to the revision. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. You do this by issuing the revision. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. you need to add one. under Sheets. 8 In the Tags dialog. and because the revision is the first in the project. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. click OK. click Training Files. 10 In the drawing area. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. Working with Revisions In this exercise. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. In the Tags dialog. double-click A107 . 5 In the Tags dialog.Unnamed. 6 Click Load. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Working with Revisions | 297 . scroll down to Revision Clouds. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Tags. You then issue a revision. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds.rvt. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag.4 On the Options Bar. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. on which you place a revised view. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. select Leader.

NOTE After you issue a revision. under Add. click Revisions. and click OK. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. 298 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . for Visible. You can continue to add revisions. click Revisions. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. click New. 6 In the Revisions dialog. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. select Issued. you can no longer modify it. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. select None for each issued revision. On the Settings menu. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project.Title Sheet. you learn to import information from other applications. such as images.rvt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.JPG. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.9 Click OK. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. Importing from Other Applications | 299 . text. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. into a project. and place it on a sheet. double-click T . click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and spreadsheets. 1 In the Project Browser. Importing Image Files In this exercise. under Sheets. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. click Modify. for Leader. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets.5 On the Design Bar.doc text file in another window. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click T . 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. 300 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . click to add text without a leader. 6 Select the text.rvt. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. click Text.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click A102 . Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. This step has been completed for you. 5 Click OK. 9 On the Design Bar. enter Fixture Schedule. 7 In the Revit Architecture window.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window.JPG. under Sheets. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. for File name. and click Save. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. click Training Files.rvt. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. This process may vary from system to system. 10 On the Design Bar. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name. select the document writer. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. click Desktop. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise.mdi. with the new text box still selected. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. click File menu ➤ Print.JPG. click Modify. and saved as Fixture Schedule. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 3 In Microsoft Excel.Unit 18. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. click Modify. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit Architecture. This exercise demonstrates a common method. Importing Spreadsheets | 301 . 4 Under Printer.xls. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format.

12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 302 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .

for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. or footprint. as well as a large lab building. The large floor plan. called dependent views. To effectively document this project. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. 303 . you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. you break up the plan into sections.Using Dependent Views 8 In this tutorial.

304 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

| 305 .

and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. for Name. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. enter Level 2 . click Training Files. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. right-click Dependent on Level 2.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser.Aviary. 5 Click in the drawing area. select the crop region. The dependent view opens. double-click Level 2. 6 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. click Zoom To Fit. under Level 2. and click Rename. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. 306 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up.The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. and the model crop is the interior crop region. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 307 .

click Zoom To Fit. and click Rename. enter Level 2 . 12 In the Project Browser. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). right-click Level 2. 10 On the Zoom flyout. click (Hide Crop Region). for Name. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. 14 Click in the drawing area. and click OK. 308 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 15 Select the crop region. 11 In the Project Browser.Labs. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.9 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Rename View dialog.

click Zoom To Fit. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click Level 2. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 309 . 20 On the Zoom flyout. click Matchline. click (Hide Crop Region). The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 19 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click Finish Sketch. 310 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and click. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. 24 On the Design Bar. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building.

select 9. and click Rename. 33 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select Double Dash. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. enter Level 2 Aviary. 31 In the Project Browser. and drag it onto the sheet. click Level 2 . 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click OK. for Line Weight. click the Annotation Objects tab. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 311 .Unnamed.Aviary. 28 For Line Pattern. for Name. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. under Floor Plans.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. right-click A101 . expand Sheets. and click OK. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 27 Under Matchline.

35 On the Design Bar. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 312 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .Aviary is selected.Labs dependent view on the sheet. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . double-click Level 2. click View Reference. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 39 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. and place the Level 2 . 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. click Modify. for Target view. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

44 On the Design Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 313 . 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 46 In the Project Browser. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. click Modify. 45 On the Zoom flyout. 41 On the Options Bar. 47 On the View Control Bar. for Target view. click (Show Crop Region).Aviary. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 . click Zoom To Fit.Labs.

select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). right-click. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. 49 If. after modifying the annotation crop region. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. 314 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click the far right control. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display.48 Select the crop region.

right-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. and click OK. 54 In the Project Browser. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 315 . 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. under Floor Plans. but are not placed on sheets. click Zoom To Fit. expand Level 1. select all views in the list. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. click (Hide Crop Region). Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. 55 On the Zoom flyout. and click Apply Dependent Views. 53 In the Select Views dialog.51 On the View Control Bar. 57 On the Zoom flyout. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view.

and click Rename. The matchline is already placed in the view. right-click South Elevation.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click South Elevation. and click OK. enter South Elevation . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the drawing area. The dependent view opens.Left.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 3 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 316 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . right-click Dependent on South Elevation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 In the Project Browser. expand South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select the Crop Region. click Training Files. for Name.

click (Hide Crop Region). 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. for Name. 11 Select the crop region. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. click (Hide Crop Region). right-click South Elevation. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click OK. and click Rename. enter South Elevation . 13 On the View Control Bar. for Name.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. under Sheets. enter South Elevation. 7 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Rename. and drag it toward the center of the view. right-click A103 Unnamed. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 317 . 9 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. cropping the view to the aviary.Right. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 10 In the Rename View dialog. cropping the view to the lab building. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click OK.

for Target view. 22 On the Design Bar. verify that Elevation: South Elevation . click South Elevation . click Modify. click View Reference. double-click South Elevation. click South Elevation .18 In the Project Browser. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. under Elevations. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.Left is selected.Right. and drag it onto the sheet.Left. 25 On the Options Bar. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. 20 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. 318 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and drag it onto the sheet. under Elevations. 23 In the Project Browser.

Right. under Sheets (all). select Elevation: South Elevation . Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 319 .South Elevation. double-click A103 . for Target view. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.28 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Project Browser.

Select the crop region. 320 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . Right-click the view. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. and click Activate View. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet.NOTE If the view references are not visible.

Viewing and Rendering 4 321 .

322 | Chapter 9 Viewing and Rendering .

You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. 323 . More specifically. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components.Viewing 9 In this tutorial. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. how to control fill pattern colors.

locate the Project Browser.rvt. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. and double-click East. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. on the Standard toolbar. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. click . including elevation and three-dimensional views. you learn how to access different views of the building model. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. and three-dimensional (3D) views. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. expand Elevations. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. You create elevations. 324 | Chapter 9 Viewing . The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. sections. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. expand Views (all). TIP If the Project Browser does not display.

This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. 7 Click OK. The default name of the view is {3D}. 6 Under Visibility. click the Annotation Categories tab. and click Hidden Line. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. the east elevation. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. click Model Graphics Style.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. Exploring the Building Model | 325 . This change is applied only in this elevation view. scroll down and clear Window Tags. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. click . Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. This change is applied only to the active view.

You can pan. Move the mouse to pan the view. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. . 18 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). . The view follows the movement of the cursor. 326 | Chapter 9 Viewing . under 3D Views. enter My 3D View. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. click to reorient the view. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser.9 On the View toolbar. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. 16 In the Rename View dialog. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 12 Press and hold CTRL. and expand 3D Views. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. and click Rename. click X to close the view. zoom. double-click My 3D View. and click OK. right-click {3D}.

Cameras define the eye point. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 1.rvt. expand Floor Plans. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. right-click in the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 327 . outside of the dimension lines. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. m_Viewing_Exercise. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. as shown in the following illustration. and click View. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 327. expand Views (all). eye height. After you specify the second point (the view target). and distance from the target. click Camera.

9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 328 | Chapter 9 Viewing . Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. click Dynamically Modify View. 5 On the View menu. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. Press and hold the left mouse button. down. Move the cursor up. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. Press and hold the left mouse button. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. and sideways to see how the view changes. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model.

click Tile. and target 12 On the Window menu. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. Press and hold the left mouse button. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 329 . 13 On the View menu. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. height. Change the camera position.

The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. 16 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views. and click Show Camera.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 330 | Chapter 9 Viewing . double-click 3D View 1. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views.

TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. click Model Graphics Style. 20 On the View Control Bar. and move it to another location. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 331 . right-click. and click Element Properties. In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View.17 In My 3D View. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. click to create a new 3D view. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. under Camera. Click OK. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. and click Shading.

as shown in the following illustration. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Box.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. 22 On the View menu. 332 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and click OK. A section box is displayed around the model. A rotation tool is also displayed. 24 Click the section box. under Extents. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. click View Properties.

m_Viewing_Exercise.26 Click and hold the rotation tool. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. “Creating a Section View” on page 333. double-click Level 1. Creating a Section View | 333 . expand Floor Plans. click Section. and maximize this view. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Section View In this exercise. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and rotate the section box around the model.

The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. 7 In the Go To View dialog. expand Sections. and click Find Referring Views. select the section view. and double-click Section 1. select Floor Plan: Level 1. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. right-click. double-click the section head. or in the Project Browser. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. View the section 5 To view the section. 8 Select the section line. click Modify. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. 334 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and click Open View.

You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. 14 On the Design Bar. Notice the change in the view direction. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 335. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area.9 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Elevation Views | 335 . under Floor Plans. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. click Elevation. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. 12 Select the section line. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. m_Viewing_Exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1. double-click Level 1.rvt. move the cursor around the building model. click Modify. Notice the change in section depth. click Modify.

4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. under Elevations. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. Elevation 1 .a. 336 | Chapter 9 Viewing . double-click Level 1. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. 10 In the Project Browser. Do not select the arrow. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click Elevation 1 . Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. 5 On the Design Bar. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. zoom in.b. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation.b. and click. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. Elevation 1 . The elevation is named Elevation 1 . click Modify. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view.a by default. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and other families. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. and open Common\c_Showroom. in a compound wall. click Training Files.11 If you want to save your changes. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. where each layer is assigned a different material. a shade of gray. such as the one below. on the File menu. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 337 . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For example. click Save As. This includes walls. in this case. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. and the insulation color to pink. and applies to phasing override materials as well.rvt. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. and save the exercise file with a unique name. roofs. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. In addition. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. such as Brick on CMU. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. floors.

A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Under Cut Pattern. The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. expand Sections (Section Head .Brick for Name. click Materials. expand Views (all). select red. Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. expand Views (all). Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . 5 In the Color dialog.Filled). View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Materials dialog. click Color. and click OK twice. expand 3D Views.Brick for Name. select Masonry . 2 On the Settings menu. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. click Materials. 338 | Chapter 9 Viewing . select Masonry . The surface pattern of the brick is black. 9 In the Materials dialog.Level 3. and double-click 3D.

c_Showroom. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. expand Floor Plans. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 339. click Color. select white. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 339 .10 Under Surface Pattern. click View Properties. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. and double-click Level 1. 11 In the Color dialog. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. expand Views (all). 12 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. and click OK twice. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the View menu.

double-click Level 2. click Edit/New. select Solid fill for Name. click Save As. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. and click OK. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 14 If you want to save your changes. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. 7 In the Color dialog. 12 On the View Control Bar. By default. and click OK three times. If you create more than one plan region in a file. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. click Modify. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Detail Level. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. . the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. although they may have 340 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. 10 On the Design Bar. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click Element Properties. select a shade of gray. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. and click Fine. right-click. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

refer to the online Help for more information. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 341 . By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. line color. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Architecture files. and you cannot control their visibility. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Architecture. click Training Files. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. line type. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or pattern. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan.coincident edges.

On the Options Bar. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. right-click in the Design Bar.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click View. click . Plan regions have a single property. click Lines. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. which is similar to the view range for plan views. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. the top and bottom clip planes. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 342 | Chapter 9 Viewing . ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. view range. 3 In the Level 1 view. the south elevation is also displayed. In the following illustration. and the view depth plane. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. click Plan Region. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. and click Element Properties. click Edit for View Range. 8 Click Apply. 6 In the View Range dialog. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. The plan region displays as a dashed green line. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. and then click OK twice. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. the line turns red. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. top and bottom clip planes. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. By selecting Parent View’s Level. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. under Extents.■ ■ On the Design Bar. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 343 . 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. When you select the plan region. Press ESC to end the command. 4 Select the plan region. click Modify.

10 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. click Save As.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 344 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. 345 .Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Architecture that is used to produce rendered views. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit Architecture 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. billboards. to place and render decals to create signs. and posters.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. After you create the perspective view. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. When you complete these changes. the floor. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. you select a scene that defines the model environment. and create the perspective view that you want to render. 346 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. In this exercise. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site.

9 Under AccuRender. under Construction. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . click Training Files.Cavity Wall . Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. click Edit for Structure. 3 On the Options Bar.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Materials. click next to Texture to display the Material Library.Brick. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 347 . TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. click .rvt. and click Edit/New. select Masonry . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Materials dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.Brick. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. click Wall. verify that Co-house . and click the tab in the context menu. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. under Name.

Polished and click OK. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. under Name. 16 In the Type Properties dialog.Asphalt. 24 In the Material Library. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. and click . 25 Under Name. under Construction. 26 Click OK twice. click Materials. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. 348 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Layer 2. 14 On the Options Bar. under Name. enter Aluminum. expand Metals. click Edit for Structure.200mm. and click Aluminum. under _accurender. 27 On the Design Bar. . 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. 12 Click OK twice. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 23 Under AccuRender. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. 18 In the Materials dialog.Plain.Running. 22 In the New Material dialog. click Edit/New. click Modify. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Site . 21 In the Materials dialog. 19 Click OK four times. under _accurender. select Carib. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 11 Under Name. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. select Polished. click Duplicate. expand Masonry and click Brick.

under Name. click Edit/New. click . Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. select the curtain wall mullion again. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. select Aluminum. under Materials and Finishes. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. 29 On the Options Bar. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. and then click . 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. Polished. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. 33 Click OK three times. verify that New is selected. and click OK. 32 In the Materials dialog. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. floor.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 349 . click No. click in the Material field. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. select Exterior under Type. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. click Region Raytrace. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.

m_Cohouse. expand Floor Plans. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. floor. 350 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 38 On the Design Bar. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. when you render an exterior view of the model. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. producing a photorealistic effect. In a later exercise. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings.rvt. Cnst. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments).The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. expand Views (all). “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 350. and double-click 1st Flr. you place two different types of trees on the building site.

right-click in the Design Bar. click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. Create a new type of tree. select M_Tree .9 Meters. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Site Component. select any of the deciduous trees.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click to place a tree.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. Adding Trees to the Site | 351 . click Modify. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. 7 In the Type Selector. and click Site. and click . Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar.

and click OK twice. and click OK. and click OK. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. as shown in the following illustration. 13 Under Name.8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Black Oak. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. click Duplicate. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. select Oak. and then click display the Plant Library. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the Plant Library. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 352. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. click in the Value field for Plant Name. select Black Oak for Type Comments. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. and place two black oak trees. Black. expand Trees and Shrubs. under Other. 352 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 10 In the Name dialog. 15 Under Other. click Edit/New. under Identity Data. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. and click Deciduous.rvt. under accurender. m_Cohouse.

view open. Cnst. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. click Camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View | 353 . 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. The new perspective view is displayed. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr.

double-click 1st Flr. Cnst. and click Show Camera. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. expand 3D Views.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). view. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. 354 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Cnst.

and click Rename.7 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter Exterior. and click OK. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. you select a scene and specify time. and environment settings that you use to render the view. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click 3D View 1.rvt. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 355. 8 In the Rename View dialog. lighting. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 355 . double-click Exterior. date. m_Cohouse. place.

Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. and click Sun.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. under Scene Settings. 356 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 Select By Date. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. Time. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click the Solar Angles tab. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. click Settings. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 8 Under Time. 7 Under Date. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog.

and select Boston. select Grass. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar.20 for Cloudiness. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. 10 Click in the Cities list. click No.9 Click the Place tab. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. click . 12 Click the Settings Tab. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 357 . under _accurender. and click OK. 11 Scroll down. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. The Ground Plane tab displays. 16 In the Environment dialog. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. under Scene Settings. 26 On the Design Bar. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. and click OK. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. under Background Color. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. 18 Click Material. select Autumn for Plant Season. USA. 13 Enter . 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. click Image Size. under Scene Settings. click Environment. click Site.00 (many clouds. click Raytrace. 19 In the Material Library. 20 In the Name list. Rye. 27 On the Options Bar. 17 Under Advanced. select Ground Plane.) 14 Click OK. and enter bo. 21 Click OK twice. select Good for Quality. MA. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. click Capture Rendering. Dark.

expand Renderings. To create the rendered scene. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 32 If you want to save this exercise. Cnst. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 358. define the view and render scene settings. Adding RPC People In this exercise. and double-click 2nd Flr. m_Cohouse. click Save As. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. expand Floor Plans. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson.rvt. and finally. 358 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model.30 On the Design Bar. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. and save the exercise file with a unique name. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. on the File menu. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved.

2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. click Component. 4 In the Type Selector. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 7 Repeat steps 4 . 5 On the Options Bar. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast).6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). select Rotate after placement. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Adding RPC People | 359 .

2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 360. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. 360 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Camera. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.8 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. m_Cohouse.

double-click 2nd Flr. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. The interior perspective is displayed. Cnst. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 361 . 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. enter 178 mm for Height. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 362 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Size. and click Rename. and click OK. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. click the dimensions for Size. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter 229 mm for Width. right-click 3D View 1. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar.

15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 363 .9 In the Rename View dialog. click View Properties. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the section box. and click OK. under Extents. 12 On the View menu. select Section Box. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. enter Interior. and click OK. 11 On the View menu. Grips are displayed on the section box. 14 On the Design Bar. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. click to display the 3D view of the building model. click Modify. A section box is displayed around the building model.

specify a file location and name for the scene settings. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. and environment settings used to render the view. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. m_Cohouse. under Scene Settings. click Settings. date. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. click the Solar Angles tab. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 17 In the Environment dialog.rvt. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. 9 Under Time. MA. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 13 Click the Settings tab. and enter bo. select New. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. you reduce the rendering time. and click Sun. 12 Scroll down. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. 7 Select By Date. and click Save. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. and select Boston. under Scene Settings. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. and enter Interior Scene for Name. you create a render scene to specify the time. on the Main tab. select Interior. 14 Click Save. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. and click OK. By limiting the geometry. Time.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. 8 Under Date. USA. place. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 364 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Environment. under Background Color. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 364. 10 Click the Place tab. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. 11 Click in the Cities list. 4 Under Type.

click Site. such as windows and doors. under Use View’s Section Box. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.18 Under Advanced. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. as daylight sources. and click OK. select Grass. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 365. under accurender. 20 In the Material Library. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. double-click Interior. select {3D}. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 365 . Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 24 Under Scene Settings. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. click Daylights. 5 On the Design Bar. Curtain Wall 1). 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. double-click {3D}. Rye. click Radiate. click OK.rvt. under 3D Views. You can select families with transparent materials. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. select Summer for Plant Season. select Ground Plane. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Cohouse. The Ground Plane tab displays. 21 In the Name list. 22 Click OK twice. Dark. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. 19 Click Material.

begins. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. 7 On the Design Bar. which can take several minutes. 9 If you want to save your changes. the following rendered view is displayed. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. . 366 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .The radiosity process. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Raytrace. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. on the File menu. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 Close the exercise file. click Save As. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. When radiate completes. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps.

you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. proceeds through the dining room. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. elevation. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. and ends in the far corner of the living room. click Settings ➤ Project Units. but you can also define it in a 3D. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. and open Common\c_Townhouse. In a plan view. you must select or define a scene. and change unit formats as desired. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. If you prefer to use Metric values. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. or section view. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2008. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. The walkthrough path is a spline. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Architecture software.rvt. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. click Training Files. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 367 .

click . expand Views (all). and double-click Walkthrough 1. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. or the first key frame. expand Walkthroughs. and click the tab in the context menu. and click to specify the start point.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click Walkthrough. 368 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 1st Floor. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). expand Floor Plans. of the walkthrough. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view.

12 On the View menu. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. and click OK. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. verify Field of view is selected. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog.The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. Creating a Walkthrough | 369 . Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 11 Under Change. If it is not. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. click Edit Walkthrough. 9 On the Options Bar. select the crop boundary. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. and select the crop boundary. 14 Click . enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 13 On the Options Bar.

click Edit Walkthrough. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 370. and click OK. clear Far Clip Active. proceed to the next exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. 2 On the Options Bar. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. under Extents. 16 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). enter 1 for Frame. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click 1st Floor. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. click . The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. 17 Click . 18 When the walkthrough stops playing.rvt. The walkthrough plays. press ESC. and click OK.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. c_Townhouse. 370 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

select Path for Controls.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. You can move any camera target or key frame position. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 371 . 6 On the Options Bar.

rvt. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 2 In the Save As dialog. double-click Walkthrough 1. 1 On the File menu. and then click to play the walkthrough. select <Shading> for Display mode. If you are unsure of what option to use. and click OK. and click Save. 4 Under Format. click Edit Walkthrough. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. specify 15 for Frames per Second. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. without opening Revit Architecture 2008. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. The AVI is recorded. shaded. When you export the walkthrough. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 372. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 3 Under Output Length. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. c_Townhouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. It produces files that are larger than compressed files.7 Click the third key frame position. or with AccuRender raytracing. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. under Walkthroughs. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. 372 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . hidden line. shaded with edges.

Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. Recording the Walkthrough | 373 . click Save As. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. specifying the number of frames.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. on the File menu. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. and save the exercise file with a unique name. reducing the size of the image. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. 8 If you want to save this exercise.

374 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. In this tutorial. 375 . You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. More specifically.

click Training Files. click Camera. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Courtyard View In this exercise. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. Creating a Solar Study . and open Common\c_Solar_Study. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. as shown. 376 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 1 In the Project Browser. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. expand Views (all). and double-click 01 Entry.rvt. expand Floor Plans. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. A 3D view is created. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

you create a section cutaway view. click Save As.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 377. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 377 . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise.Courtyard View. 6 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. 8 In the Project Browser. if necessary. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog. as shown. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. click to reorient the view. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 On the File menu. right-click 3D View 1. and click Rename. enter Solar Study . 7 Click the view boundary to select it. double-click 01 Entry. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Modify. 9 In the Rename View dialog.4 On the View toolbar. expand 3D Views. as shown.

5 On the Design Bar. 378 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . to reorient the view. and click OK. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. right-click Section 1. 8 In the Rename View dialog. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 6 To view the section. click Modify. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click . and click Rename. expand Sections. double-click the section head.3 On the Design Bar. click 10 On the View toolbar. 7 In the Project Browser. click Section.

and click OK. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Typical plan views. click Modify. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 16 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 379 . to expand the dialog. including the house. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click Callout. 14 In the Project Browser. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. then Fine. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. clear Section Boxes. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 379. then select Medium. and click Rename. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. 13 On the Design Bar.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. under Floor Plans. click Save. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. In some cases. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. you create a plan cutaway view. as shown. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click 01 Entry. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. 18 On the File menu. and under Orient to a View. 17 To hide the section box. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. do not display many elements in 3D. right-click {3D}. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. under 3D Views.

4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. to reorient the view. and click OK. click Modify. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 6 In the Rename View dialog. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 380 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 11 On the Design Bar. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. and click Rename. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. click . as shown. click 8 On the View toolbar. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. and under Orient to a View. 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. as shown.

21 On the File menu. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . 18 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 381 .15 Select the Roof. 19 In the Rename View dialog. 16 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. and click Rename. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. 20 On the View Control Bar. right-click {3D}. and click OK. click Save. 17 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. so you can see into the building from the top. under 3D Views.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway.

you specify the location. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. CA. select Los Angeles. 2 On the View Control Bar. you specify the location. date range. USA is selected. For the Multi-Day solar study. and double-click Solar Study . date. or multi-day solar study. USA. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project.Boston. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. for City. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. and time range. leave the slider at 50. click . enter Summer Solstice. expand 3D Views. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. For the Single-Day solar study. Los Angeles. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. For this study. 10 Under Place. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. . expand Views (all). MA. Click the Single-Day tab.Courtyard View. and time. Creating Solar Studies . 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click Duplicate. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. and click OK. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. click . and click OK. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 3 Select Cast Shadows. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. You can create a still. 9 In the Name dialog. 382 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. single-day.

select Winter Solstice. Los Angeles. 2006. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. click OK. and click OK. select June 22. 7 On the Options Bar. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . confirm that Summer Solstice. ■ For Time Interval. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. Under Frame. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.Courtyard View is currently displayed. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. under Sun and Shadows Settings. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. and click OK. click . you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. and click Duplicate. 16 In the Name dialog. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 14 In this case. click Save. and click OK. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. under Frame. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. enter 20 and press ENTER. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 6 On the View Control Bar. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 383. click . select December 22. click To display the next key frame. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. 19 On the File menu. Los Angeles is selected.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. 2006. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 383 . enter 10 and press ENTER. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. enter Winter Solstice. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. click OK. on the Single-Day tab. Clear Ground Plane at Level. . Los Angeles. for Date. For Time Range. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. click .

Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 14 On the Options Bar. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click and enter Dining. 384 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. The solar study animation plays. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. click . click . under Floor Plans. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. 13 On the View Control Bar. Los Angeles. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click To play the animation from start to finish. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.■ To display the next sequential frame. click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click Text. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. Click outside of the text box to end the command. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. under Sun and Shadows Settings. approximately as shown. on the Single-Day tab. double-click 01 Entry. select Summer Solstice. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. . you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. click . Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. approximately as shown.

5 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. and click OK. and click OK. Los Angeles. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. 6 On the View Control Bar. as shown. click . select Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. expand 3D Views. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Section Boxes. Exporting the Study as AVI | 385 . On the Options Bar. on the Single-Day tab. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. click . as shown. 11 To display the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Lines.

if necessary. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. and enter 5 to 50. enter 450 in the first field (width). select AVI Files. 15 To hide the section box. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. For Frames per second. verify that Hidden Line is selected. select the section box. 386 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . for Model Graphics Style. To maintain the proportions of the frame. select Frame range. On the Annotation Categories tab. For Save as type. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. verify that the value is set to 15.12 In the drawing area. Under Format. For File name. 14 Click outside of the section box. as shown. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control.Los Angeles. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Under Output Length. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. For Dimensions. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . and click OK. clear Section Boxes. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.

select PNG. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. click OK. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. In this example. For File name. For Save as type. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. click . Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. or GIF. click Save. NOTE When you export to PNG. click Save. or frame. and enter 5 to 10. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. for Compressor. such as JPEG. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 387. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. For Frames per second. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . BMP. Los Angeles. 20 On the File menu. you open each image. for Model Graphics Style. verify that Hidden Line is selected. 2 On the View Control Bar.Los Angeles. on the Single-Day tab. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 387 . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Under Format. or any single-frame format. and click OK. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. select Winter Solstice. click Save. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. For Dimensions. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 8 In the Save As dialog. Under Output Length. verify that the value is set to 15. depending on the Frame Range. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. TIFF. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. select Frame range. enter 450 in the first field (width). of the animation separately. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. 18 In the Save As dialog. To view the animation. 21 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. and click OK. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file.

double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. under 3D Views. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. 388 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. click Save.9 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.

3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. and on the View Control Bar. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 389 . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. as shown. 5 Select the roof.

MA. and click OK. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Compressor. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. click OK.Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. and click Save. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. 12 In the Name dialog. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. click Save. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. specify 2:00 pm. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . and click OK. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. select One week. clear Section Boxes. Click the Desktop icon. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. 17 On the View Control Bar. On the Annotation Categories tab. For Time Interval. In the Save As dialog. 8 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. click the Multi-Day tab.Week Interval.Los Angeles . 390 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . For Time. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). 18 On the File menu. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. USA. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. and click Duplicate. for File name enter 2pm .Boston.

In this exercise. select Cast Shadows. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Apply. 11 Under Date and Time. click . you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and select Winter Solstice. specify 11:00 AM for time. select Summer Solstice. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. click the Still tab. and click OK. 9 Under Date and Time. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. 2 On the View Control Bar. change the time back to 12:00 PM. Orienting to True North | 391 . Then. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. on the Still tab. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. and click OK. and click OK. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . For example.

NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. 392 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . in the Angle from Project to True North field. and select View Properties. and select Winter Solstice. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 13 On the View Control Bar. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. Notice that the project rotates in the view. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select True North. for Orientation. double-click 01 Entry. under Floor Plans. In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . and click OK. On the Options Bar. and click OK. click the Still tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click OK.

click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 21 On the View Control Bar. Los Angeles. 19 In the Project Browser. verify that AVI Files is selected. including the angle from True North. for File name.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click . In the Save As dialog. under 3D Views. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. For Save as type. click the Still tab. Orienting to True North | 393 . select Summer Solstice. 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click Apply. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. click Summer Solstice. and click OK. click the Single-Day tab. are saved with the project. click OK. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

29 On the File menu. for Orientation. for Resolution. click Save. Right-click in the drawing area. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. enter 600 in the first field. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. for Compressor. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. and select View Properties. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. capturing it. Since a rendered image is temporary. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. under Graphics. In the Element Properties dialog. click GO. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 2 In the Project Browser. 394 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 28 Once you are finished with the study. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. Rendered views do not have this limitation.■ Under Format. On the Options Bar. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. and exporting it as a JPEG image. Click the Desktop icon. In this exercise. under 3D Views. and click OK. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. under 3D Views. select Project North. 1 In the Project Browser. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. for Scene. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. and click OK. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. and click Save. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry. click Raytrace. for Dimensions. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345 for additional information on rendering. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. select Draft (75 dpi).rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. On the Options Bar.

7 Review some captured images of the building. On the Options Bar. under Renderings. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. click Capture Rendering. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project.■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Save. 5 On the Design Bar. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. In the Save As dialog. click GO. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. for Resolution. In the Project Browser. select JPEG. for Save as Type. click Export Image. and click Save. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. select Presentation (300 dpi). Rendering an Interior View | 395 . The scene is rendered in high resolution.

396 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. there are several options for expressing the architecture. you explore the stylistic approach. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. For the realistic approach. Whether the audience is the general contractor. and details. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. a consultant." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Architecture can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345. type. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. an outside reviewer. elevations. and Section Boxes. sections. In this tutorial. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. the Linework Tool.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. or the client." In Revit Architecture. length. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 397 . Advanced Model Graphics. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. To express texture beyond material specifics. A majority of tools in Revit Architecture 2008 are intended to describe number. In this series of exercises.

Co-house.building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. 398 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Using the pre-built building model.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. expand Views (all). right-click 2nd Flr. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. click Training Files. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. you create a copy of the plan. Cnst. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.rvt. expand Floor Plans. you create a presentation floor plan. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 399 . In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise.

and click OK. 7 Under Visibility. click in the drawing area. and so on in this view. click the Annotation Categories tab. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. 10 On the File menu. and clear DOWN Text. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 8 Click OK. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. UP Text. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Notice that no annotations display in this view. click the Scale control and select 1:100. expand the Stairs category. dimensions. This turns off the visibility of all tags. Down Arrow.2 In the Project Browser. sections. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Up Arrow. this represents the view getting smaller. 400 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. Cnst. click Save As. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. elevations. click Visibility/Graphics. exit the menu.

The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. Time and Place.rvt. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you can create. click for Place. ■ Under Intensity. 5 Under Settings. select Cast Shadows. click . 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Within a Project. 6 Under Settings. select Sun and Shadow Settings. and click OK. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. The higher the number. on the Still tab. select By Date. click the Place tab. click the Advanced Model Graphics control.11 In the Save As directory. and click Save.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. At that place. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 2 On the View Control Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. modify. navigate to the folder of your choice. 8 Select Boston. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 401. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 401 . you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. MA. the darker the shadows. double-click it in the Project Browser. Under Shadows Properties. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. USA for City. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify 35 for Shadow.

11 Click OK. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 17 On the File menu. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Settings. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Save. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. and click OK. and select 1st Flr. you can enter any city you wish. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Cnst. click OK. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. clear Ground Plane at Level. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. however. under Sun and Shadows Settings. click .NOTE For this step. 402 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. be aware that if you enter a different city. 18 Proceed with the next exercise. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 403. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click OK.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. TIP If the View tab is not available. 6 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click to place it. right-click the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. click Modify. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and notice a view title displays. select Arch Portrait. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 403 . click Sheet. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 4 In the Views dialog. click Add View. and click OK. and click View.

To accomplish this. and click Activate View. 404 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 In the Name dialog. and click OK. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. click OK. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 9 On the Options Bar. under Graphics. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click . Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. select No for Show Title. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. enter Presentation. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. For this analytique. and click OK. click Edit/New.

If necessary. click . for Fill Pattern. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 405 . click Region Properties. select Invisible Lines. under Graphics. 25 In the Name dialog. 22 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. fill properties. 20 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. 18 On the Options Bar. When you are finished drawing the chain. click . 17 In the Type Selector. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. click Edit/New. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. enter Solid Black. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. and select Chain. click Filled Region. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. and the boundary of the region. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. click Duplicate. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 24 In the Type Properties dialog.

28 In the Type Properties dialog. click Save. and click OK. under Identity Data. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. under Name. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. scroll down. and click Deactivate View. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. click Finish Sketch. and click View Properties. click OK. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. 406 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 406. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. enter Presentation for Sheet Name.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. and click OK. and click OK. select Solid Fill. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. 34 On the File menu. 30 On the Design Bar.

9 Click OK. under Pattern Overrides. click Visibility/Graphics. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. scroll up. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 2 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility. click in the drawing area. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. under Visibility. on the Model Categories tab. under Elevations. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. right-click Copy of South. clear Visible. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Views (all). and clear Elevation Swing. exit the menu. right-click South. and click OK.rvt. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. expand the Doors category. click Override.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. enter Presentation South Elevation. expand Elevations. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 407 . and click Rename. click in the Walls row. and click OK. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.

18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. and click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. click Save. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 408 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Duplicate. click OK. select Cast Shadows. 20 On the File menu. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. By changing the angle of the sun. 16 In the Name dialog. 12 Under Shadow Properties. select By Date. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 13 Under Intensity. under Settings. specify 35 for Shadow. and click OK. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. click . enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. Time and Place. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 408.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise.

and double-click A105 . TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. and click Add View to Sheet.rvt. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 409 . Notice the viewport displays a view title. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Presentation. 3 In the Views dialog. click Add View. expand Sheets (all). under Views (all). Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.

7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 410 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport: Presentation.5 In the Type Selector. Notice the view title no longer displays.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 411. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.8 On the File menu. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. click Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 411 . 9 Proceed with the next lesson. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise.

4 Add the section shown below. under Floor Plans. To fit correctly in the analytique. 3 On the Options Bar. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Section 2 is added to the building model. Cnst. and use the flip arrows if necessary.rvt. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). and double-click Section 2. select 1: 100 for Scale. 412 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. To accomplish this. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. double-click 1st Flr. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. expand Sections (Callout 1). click Section.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

15 Under Visibility. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. clear Visible. 10 In the Project Browser. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click in the Walls row. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. click Override. 11 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Callout of Section 2. 7 On the Options Bar. and click Rename. and click OK. 12 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Pattern Overrides. enter Presentation Section 2. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. select 1 : 100 for Scale. and click OK.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Model Categories tab. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 413 . Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Callout. under Sections (Callout 1). click Visibility/Graphics. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Section 2. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view.

scroll up. When you select the crop boundary. and clear Elevation Swing. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. 414 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. under Extents. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. clear Annotation Crop. click . 22 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.17 Under Visibility. 20 Click OK. expand the Doors category. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. clear Crop Region Visible. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. and clear Show annotation categories in this view.

Under Intensity. specify 35 for Shadow. Click Apply. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. open the Project Browser and.rvt. double-click Presentation Section 2. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Under Shadows Properties. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. click Save. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 415. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 415 . TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Cast Shadows. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.24 On the File menu. under Sections (Callout 1). 2 On the View Control Bar. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. In addition. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise.

under Settings. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. select Override Silhouettes. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. NOTE The line style. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. click . click Save. click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Silhouette Edges. 5 In the Name dialog. and click OK. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. select Directly. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. and click OK. was added to this dataset for training purposes. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. 11 On the File menu. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Silhouette Edges. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Relative to View. 10 Under Silhouette Edges.In the steps that follow. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 417. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. and click OK. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 416 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Duplicate.

and click Add View to Sheet. under Sheets (all). select Section: Presentation Section 2. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.Presentation.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. double-click A105 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Views dialog. click Modify. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. and click to place the selected view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the Type Selector.rvt. The view title no longer displays. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 417 . 6 On the Design Bar. click Add View.

10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. double-click Section 2. Using a clock as a reference. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. you click to specify the start radius. click . and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. In the steps that follow. To rotate an object. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 9 On the Edit toolbar. under Sections (Callout 1). 418 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. the callout rotates 180 degrees.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 419 .Presentation. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. and drag it up and to the left as shown. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the New View Template dialog.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Create View Template from View. click Modify. 4 In the View Templates dialog. enter Presentation. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 420 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sections (Callout 1). After applying the view template to a new section view. 16 On the File menu. click OK. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. click Save. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 420. 17 Proceed with the next exercise.15 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 2 On the View menu. double-click Presentation Section 2. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views.

right-click Copy of Section 1. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. annotations. lighting fixtures. Notice the furniture. 15 Right-click the viewport. 16 On the View menu.Presentation. Now. click View Properties. you can simply apply the presentation view template. click Apply View Template. select Presentation. select Section: Presentation Section 1. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. and click OK. under Sections (Type 1). 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Type 1). enter Presentation Section 1. 12 In the Views dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . and elevation swings no longer display. select Viewport: Presentation. click Add View. under Sheets (all). and click OK. 14 In the Type Selector. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Section 1. and click Activate View. and click Add View to Sheet. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. Working with a Presentation View Template | 421 . Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet.

Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. traditional analytiques contain a detail. 422 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . such as a tracery window or column capital. and click OK. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 20 On the File menu. click Save. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 18 Right-click the viewport. and click Deactivate View. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 422.17 In the Element Properties dialog. In this exercise. under Graphics. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique.

4 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). double-click Presentation Callout. select the callout. click Modify. and click OK. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1. 6 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sections (Callout 1). Working in a Callout Analytique | 423 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Presentation Callout. under Sections (Callout 1). After you add the callout. right-click Callout of Section 1. 5 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename.rvt. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Callout.

424 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. clear Crop Region Visible. 8 Right-click. under Extents. and click OK. clear Annotation Crop. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. and click View Properties.

double-click A105 . 17 On the View menu. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. and click OK. click View Properties. select Section: Presentation Callout. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. and click Activate View. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.Presentation. under Sheets (all). 14 In the Type Selector. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. Working in a Callout Analytique | 425 . and click Deactivate View. select Viewport: Presentation. click Add View. and move it into the position shown below. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select Custom for View Scale.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 12 In the Views dialog.

and make adjustments as necessary. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. click Region Properties. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. click Filled Region. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 426 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. and click OK. select Solid Black for Type. In the steps that follow. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. under Sections (Callout 1). When finished. double-click Presentation Callout. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. activate the viewport.

under Sheets (all). and click Activate View. Working in a Callout Analytique | 427 . 29 On the Options Bar.Presentation. click . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.26 On the Project Browser. double-click A105 . 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. and sketch the rectangle shown below.

and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. and click OK. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 428 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click View Properties. 33 Select the crop region. select Crop Region Visible. 31 On the View menu. under Extents.30 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region.

36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and click OK. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 429 . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. click View Properties. click Save. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. 37 On the File menu. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 429. clear Crop Region Visible. and click Deactivate View. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. under Extents.34 On the View menu. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. and apply shadows to the views.

enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 430 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. click the Scale control. click Orient ➤ Southwest. and click 1 : 200. under 3D Views. Under Intensity. double-click Isometric. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Under Shadows Properties. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. 3 On the View Control Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Name dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 2 On the View menu. click Duplicate. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. specify 35 for Shadow.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click .

under 3D Views. under 3D Views. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. click View Properties. Select 1st Flr. under Settings. 13 In the Rename View dialog. select Section Box. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. and click OK. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. under 3D Views. and click OK. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. select Override Silhouettes. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. Select Ground Plane at Level. and click Rename. and click OK. under Extents. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. and click Rename. enter Isometric 1. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 1. Cnst. enter Isometric 2. 15 In the Project Browser. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. 18 On the View menu. 14 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. Select Relative to View. in the list. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 431 .8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. right-click Isometric. double-click Isometric 2. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. under 3D Views. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. under Silhouette Edges. 16 In the Rename View dialog.

23 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. under 3D Views. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. make a duplicate of the view. When you are finished. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You can use this to rotate the section box. 22 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. right-click Isometric 2.20 Select the section box. 432 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Modify on the Design Bar. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box.

32 On the Annotation Categories tab. 25 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Next. 26 To hide the section box. When you are finished. and click OK. 29 Select the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Presentation. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click Isometric 3. in the Type Selector. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 433 . and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. click Modify on the Design Bar. 31 To hide the section box. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. select Viewport: Presentation. 34 In the Project Browser. either adjust the plane location. under Sheets (all).24 In the Rename View dialog. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. double-click A105 . clear Section Boxes. double-click Isometric 2. enter Isometric 3. the stairs and railings may display. Notice the section box no longer displays. and click OK. under 3D Views. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. In such a case. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. under 3D Views.

Notice the filled region partially covers the view. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. select Viewport: Presentation. 36 In the Project Browser.35 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. 434 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . in the Type Selector.

click Finish Sketch. click Lines. 39 On the Design Bar. 47 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 45 On the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 435 . 44 Using the drawing tools. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. select Transparent for Background. This will make it easier to draw lines. click Region Properties. under Graphics. and then click Edit/New. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 43 On the Design Bar. click Edit. and click Activate View. 42 Click OK twice. select Solid Black for Type. 38 Select the poche filled region. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. select Concrete for Type. and on the Options Bar. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. and click Deactivate View. click Region Properties. The image below shows the lines redrawn. 41 In the Type Properties dialog.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.

click Save. double-click 1st Flr. a cutaway perspective view. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. then you specify the eye direction and range.rvt. Cnst.49 On the File menu. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. click Camera. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 436. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. you create the final view for the analytique. under Floor Plans. you add it to the presentation sheet. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 436 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view.

click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click . Under Intensity. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. specify 35 for Shadow. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 437 .The view opens immediately. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. select Cast Shadows. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Under Shadows Properties.

click View Properties. under Silhouette Edges. select Section Box. and click OK. A section box now cuts through the building model. 12 Select the section box. select Override Silhouettes. and click OK. Notice the controls that display on each plane. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. and click OK. 438 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Extents. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style.

drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. 21 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click View menu ➤ View Properties. On the Annotation Categories tab. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. clear Section Boxes. Clear Crop Region Visible. After placing it. and click OK. under 3D Views. under Sheets (all). Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 439 . 18 To hide the crop region. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. 17 Under Model Crop Size.14 Select the crop boundary. 19 To hide the section box. under Change. and click OK. select Scale (locked proportions). 15 On the Options Bar. double-click A105 .Presentation. you must specify the actual size of the image. click Size. and click OK. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. enter 165 mm for Width.

Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Title. 9 In the Name dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Save. select a font. and click OK. click Edit/New. click Edit/New. and click OK. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. click . 440 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. specify a text size of 40 mm. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. select Text : Title. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify a text size of 6 mm. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 440. enter Description. click Duplicate. click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. select the same font as the title. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. 5 In the Name dialog. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.22 On the File menu.

17 On the Design Bar. select Text : Description. click Modify. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. Annotating the Analytique | 441 . 15 In the Type Selector. click Save. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 18 On the File menu.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text.

442 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 5 443 .

444 | Chapter 13 Importing and Exporting

Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

13

In this tutorial, you learn how to export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk®3ds Max® or Autodesk®VIZ, where you render it and create a daylight analysis. Autodesk 3ds Max is a professional three-dimensional animation package that provides robust animation, modelling, and workflow functionality for the most complex problems in design visualization and visual effects. Autodesk VIZ is a 3D modelling, rendering, and presentation software application that provides state-of-the-art image creation technologies for communicating and sharing your design intent. For simplicity, this tutorial uses 3ds Max, but the same workflow applies in VIZ. NOTE To complete this tutorial, you must have Autodesk 3ds Max 9 installed on your system. If you do not have 3ds Max installed on your system, or if you have an earlier version of the software, you can download a free trial from the Autodesk website.

445

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk 3ds Max and render it. To export the building model to 3ds Max, you select a 3D view of the building in Revit Architecture and export its geometry and data to a DWG file. You then link the DWG file to a new 3ds Max scene. NOTE You can also import the DWG file into 3ds Max, but linking allows you to easily update the 3ds Max scene with any changes that you make to the Revit Architecture model after you initially import it. After you link the DWG file in 3ds Max, you quickly render a view of the building model. The AccuRender materials that are applied to elements in the Revit Architecture building model can be rendered in 3ds Max. After you make some minor adjustments to the materials, you add a daylight system and a sky to produce a more polished rendering.

Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Export to 3DS.rvt.

Export a Revit Architecture building model to a DWG file
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click To Building. The view of the building that you want to render in 3ds Max displays.

446 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

There are a few steps you can take to reduce the geometry and data in the model to make the export process more efficient. You can change the detail level of the view, use a section box to limit the view geometry, and turn off visibility of building elements. Because this building model is small, it is not necessary to use any of these options at this time.

2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. 3 In the Export dialog:

For Save in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Under File Naming, verify that Automatic and Long are selected. If these options are selected, a file name that consists of the dataset name appended with the view name automatically displays for the File Name.

Click Options.

4 In the Export Options dialog, under Solids (3D views only), select Export as ACIS solids, and click OK. The 3D elements in the building model will be exported as ACIS solids, or as 3D objects with multiple sides. If you select to export as polymesh, each element would be exported as an object made up of multiple polygons that are joined, or ''meshed'' together. When exporting to a DWG for use in Max, it is recommended that you export building models to DWG as ACIS solids. 5 In the Export dialog, click Save. 6 In the alert dialog, click OK to ignore the view crop boundary. The building model is exported to a DWG file in the Training location that you specified. 7 Minimize Revit Architecture but keep it open, as you modify the building model and reload it later in the tutorial. Next, link the file to a 3ds Max scene and render it. Link a DWG file to 3ds Max if you anticipate making changes to the building model that you want to reexport to 3ds Max. Import files when you want to export only one iteration of a design for use in 3ds Max.

Create a 3ds Max scene
8 Open 3ds Max, and if the Welcome screen displays, click Close. 9 Click File menu ➤ New. 10 In the New Scene dialog, select New All, and click OK. 11 Click Customize menu ➤ Units Setup.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 447

12 In the Units Setup dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Display Unit Scale, select US Standard. Verify Feet w/Fractional Inches is displayed. Under Lighting Units, select American. Click OK.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the file as RAC Building.max.

Link the Revit Architecture building model to 3ds Max
14 Click File menu ➤ File Link Manager. 15 In the File Link Manager dialog, click the Presets tab. 16 Under Named Presets, select Revit, and click Modify. This preset contains the desired settings for linking Revit Architecture building models. 17 In the File Link Settings: DWG Files dialog, click the Advanced tab. 18 Verify Use scene material assignments on Reload is selected. This setting ensures that material changes that you make in 3ds Max will be preserved if you reload the DWG file. 19 Click Cancel. 20 In the File Link Manager, click the Attach tab, and click File. 21 In the Open dialog:

For Look in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Select c_Export_to_3DS.rvt-3DView-ToBuiliding.dwg, and click Open.

22 In the File Link Manager dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Preset, select Revit. Click the Attach tab. Click Select Layers to include. A dialog listing all the layers that were created when you exported the Revit Architecture building model to the DWG displays.

23 In the Select Layers dialog:
■ ■

Select Select from list. Scroll to view the layers, and verify that a check mark displays to the left of each layer name to indicate it is selected. In this tutorial, you want all the layers visible, but you can use this dialog control the layers that display in your 3ds Max scene.

Click OK.

24 In the File Link Manager, click Attach this file. 25 In the Proxy Object dialog, click Yes.

448 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

The file opens in the 3ds Max, and 4 different views of the building model display. Only the single camera position that created the 3d To Building view was exported with the Revit Architecture building model.

26 Close the File Link Manager.

Adjust a scene for rendering
27 On the bottom right of the screen, click in the Perspective viewport to set it current. The edges of the viewport are highlighted in yellow when the viewport is current. 28 In the top left corner of the viewport, right-click the Perspective viewport label, and click Views ➤ Camera: To Building.

29 Adjust the view:

■ ■

In the lower-right corner of the screen, click Click in the Camera: To Building viewport.

(Dolly Camera).

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 449

Press and hold the mouse button, and drag the cursor toward you until the view is adjusted as shown.

Render the scene

30 On the Main toolbar, click

(Quick Render).

The scene renders and the rendering displays in the Render window. There are a couple of adjustments that you want to make to the rendering, including the quality of the glass and stone materials. Because this is an exterior view, you also want to add a daylight system (a sun) and a sky in the background.

31 Close the render window. NOTE If you want to save any of your renderings as you progress through this tutorial, at the top of the render window, click .

450 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Improve the quality of the glass and stone materials in 3ds Max

32 On the Main toolbar, click

(Material Editor). (Get Material).

33 In the Material Editor, under the bottom left side of the material slots, click 34 On the left side of the Material/Map Browser, under Browse From, select Scene.

All of the materials applied to the Revit Architecture elements that were exported to the DWG file with the elements display in the right pane of the browser. 35 In the list of materials, select and drag Glass to one of the material slots at the top of the Material Editor.

36 In the Instance (Copy) Material dialog, verify Instance is selected, and click OK. 37 In the Material Editor, change the color of the glass:
■ ■ ■

Under Templates, select Glass - Clear. Under Physical Qualities, for Diffuse Color, click the color swatch. In the Color Selector, specify a golden brown color, and click Close.

38 Change the quality of the stone material on the retaining wall:

■ ■

In the Material Editor, select another slot, and click

(Pick Material from Object).

In the Camera: To Building viewport, move the cursor over the retaining wall and click to select it.

■ ■

In the Material Editor, under Templates, select Stone. Close the Material Editor and the Material Map Browser.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 451

Add a sun and sky
39 Click in the Top viewport and zoom out until you can see the entire building and the camera. 40 Click Create menu ➤ Lights ➤ Daylight System. 41 In the Daylight Object Creation dialog, click Yes.

42 In the Top viewport, to the right of the building, click and drag to place and size the compass rose. 43 Move the cursor down and to the right to place the sun.

44 On the right side of the screen, locate the Command panel and click 45 Under Daylight Parameters, under Position, click Setup. 46 Under Location, click Get Location. 47 In the Geographic Location list, select Boston, MA, and click OK. 48 Under Site, for North Direction, enter 250. 49 Under Time:
■ ■ ■

(Modify).

For Hours, enter 12. For Month, enter 7. For Day, enter 21.

452 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

For Year, enter 2007.

50 Click Rendering menu ➤ Environment, and verify that the Environment tab is displayed. 51 Under Common Parameters, and under Background, click the color swatch, and set the background color to a sky blue color.

Render the scene

52 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene Dialog).

53 At the bottom of the panel, for Viewport, select Camera: To Building, and click the lock that displays next to the selector. The lock lets you adjust the scene in other viewports (which become active as you use them), and then click Render to render the viewport you originally chose. When off, Render always renders the active viewport. 54 Under Output size, click 640 x 480. 55 Click the Advanced Lighting tab, and under Select Advanced Lighting, select <no lighting plug-in>. 56 Click Render. The scene is rendered and displays the adjustments you made to the glass and stone materials, as well as the addition of the daylight system and sky.

57 Click File menu ➤ Save. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max” on page 453.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you create and render 2 similar cutaway views of the building model. You use 2 different techniques to create the cutaway views. You create the first view in Revit Architecture using a section box to limit or ''cut away'' geometry from the building in the front of the To Building 3D view. You then export the geometry to the DWG file you created in a previous exercise, and reload it in the Autodesk 3ds Max scene. You learn how to use a section box to limit the building model geometry that you export, a technique that is useful and time-saving when exporting large building models.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 453

A cutaway view created by a section box in Revit Architecture and rendered in 3ds Max

After you create the first cutaway view, you create a similar view in 3ds Max by adjusting the visibility of the curtain wall elements so they are not visible to the camera, and then rendering the scene in the To Building viewport. Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt and RAC Building.max.

Create a Revit Architecture cutaway view
1 Maximize Revit Architecture. 2 In the 3D To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK. 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom Out.

454 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

A section box displays around the view.

5 Select the section box so that grips display. 6 Select and move the grips until a cutaway view displays as shown.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Reload the cutaway view in 3ds Max and render it
8 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max. 9 When the file is reloaded, render it again.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 455

Create a cutaway view in 3ds Max
10 Open Revit Architecture. 11 In the To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 12 To restore the view, in the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box, and click OK. 13 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max.

14 In 3ds Max, on the Main toolbar, click

(Select Objects by Name).

15 At the top of the Select Objects dialog, enter curtain to select all the Curtain Wall Panel and Curtain Wall Mullion objects that display in the left side of the dialog. 16 At the bottom right of the dialog, click Select. The components of the curtains wall are selected. You will create a named selected set to control the camera’s visibility of these objects.

17 On the Main toolbar, click

(Edit Named Selection Sets).

18 In the Named Selection Sets dialog, click set name. 19 Close the Named Selection Sets dialog.

(Create New Set), and enter Curtain Wall for the selection

20 Right-click in the view, and click Object Properties. 21 In the Object Properties dialog, click the General tab. 22 Under Rendering Control, clear Visible to Camera, and click OK.

23 On the Main toolbar, click

.

A cutaway view, similar to the one that you created with the Revit Architecture section box displays. 24 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Daylight Analysis” on page 457.

456 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Creating a Daylight Analysis
In this exercise, you create a daylight analysis of the Revit Architecture building model in 3ds Max. The analysis will uses daylight levels in a specific location to display a spectrum of colors on the building model. The colors indicate the different levels of light incident on each building surface. The blue and green colors indicate low light levels, while the red, yellow, and orange colors indicate high levels of light. A daylight analysis can be a useful tool in determining the sustainability of your Revit Architecture building models.

Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt, and RAC Building.max. 1 In 3ds Max, click Rendering menu ➤ Environment. 2 In the Environment and Effects dialog, under Exposure Control, select Pseudo Color Exposure Control. Pseudo Color Exposure Control is a lighting analysis tool that provides you with an intuitive way of visualizing and evaluating the lighting levels in your scenes. It maps luminance or illuminance values to pseudo colors that show the brightness of the values being converted. 3 Under Pseudo Color Exposure Control:

Under Display Type, for Quantity, select Illuminance. Illuminance displays values of light incident on surfaces.

■ ■ ■ ■

For Style, select Colored. For Scale, select Logarithmic. Under Display Range, for Min., enter 100. For Max, enter 8000. The display range sets the lowest and highest values to represent in the rendering. Although this tutorial provides display range values, when you create your own daylight analysis you will probably want to test different display ranges to get the results that you want.

4 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene).

Creating a Daylight Analysis | 457

The scene renders and displays a true color rendering in the Render window. The 256 color daylight analysis is then created.

5 If desired, in the Render window, click 6 Save and close the 3ds Max scene. 7 Maximize Revit Architecture.

, and save the file.

8 Save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the file without saving it.

458 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Importing SketchUp Files

14

The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components. In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.

After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building.

459

460 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
In this exercise, you create a Revit Architecture project, and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project, and not in the library.

Create a Revit project
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog, click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter Import SketchUp, and click Save.

Import a SketchUp model
7 On the Design Bar, click the Massing tab. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Create Mass. 9 In the informational dialog, click OK. 10 In the Name dialog, enter SketchUp Model, and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 12 In the Import/Link dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Training Files icon. Double-click the Common folder. For Files of type, select SketchUp Files. Click the Sketchup file, buildings.skp. Under Import or Link, for Layers, select All. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements, visible elements, or select from a list.

■ ■ ■

Under Layer/Level Colors, select Preserve colors. Under Positioning, select Manually place, and select Cursor at center. For Place at level, select Level 1. In a new project, Level 1 is the only choice. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from, depending on the complexity of the project.

Under Scaling, for Import units, select Auto-Detect.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 461

You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.

Click Open.

The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.

14 On the View toolbar, click

.

15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs. 17 In the warning dialog, click the Close button.

18 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Creating a Building from Mass Faces” on page 462.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces
In this exercise, you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. You turn their visibility off to view only the building.

462 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

After you create the building from the mass faces, you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.

Create roofs from mass faces
1 Zoom in to the front mass form, and on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector, verify Basic Roof: Generic - 400mm displays. 4 On the Options Bar, for Level, verify Level 2 is selected. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass, and when the cursor displays a plus sign, select the face so that it highlights in red. The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign, indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

6 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. To see the new roof, on the View toolbar, click to turn off mass visibility in the view. Click again to display masses.)

7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 463

9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view:

■ ■

On the View toolbar, click

.

In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin, and move the cursor in the drawing area until you can see the middle mass.

11 Right-click, and click Cancel to end the Spin command. 12 On the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

14 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.

464 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

21 On the Options Bar. for Loc Line. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 465 . 16 On the View toolbar. click you created. and display only the roofs that 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click . to turn off the mass visibility in the view. click Modify to end the command. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form. 20 In the Type Selector. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. verify Basic Wall: Generic . 22 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. select Core Face: Exterior.200mm displays. click Wall by Face.15 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar.

23 On the View toolbar. click Create System. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. click Curtain System. 28 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. 27 Select the left face of the left mass. 466 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . create the 2 curtain systems shown below. click to view only the walls and roofs. Create curtain systems from mass faces 25 On the Design Bar. 24 Click to redisplay the masses. 29 Using the same technique.

click . click Create Roof. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. select the other wall. Create a roof from a mass face 33 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. Create walls from mass faces 31 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. and adjust the view so you can see the back of the mass forms. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. and select it. 34 Select the mass face shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 467 . click Roof by Face. 32 Select the 5 walls highlighted below.30 On the View toolbar.

click Create System. and select the mass face shown below. click Curtain System. click to view the building that you have created. 38 On the View toolbar. 39 Click to redisplay the masses. 468 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . click Wall by Face. 36 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. Create the final wall 37 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 35 On the Design Bar.

The perspective view created by the camera displays. In the far left corner of the building that you created. 43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. under Floor Plans. 41 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. Below the right corner of the view. to view only the walls. double-click Level 1. specify a point for the camera target. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. specify a point to place the camera. and curtain systems that make up your building Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 469 . as shown. roofs. 44 On the View toolbar.Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 40 In the Project Browser. click in the view. click Camera. 42 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Modify the roofs 49 On the Views toolbar.You may need to resize the view again. click 47 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . for Justification. 48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. 46 On the Options Bar. and select the left curtain system in the view. click . Change the justification of the curtain systems 45 On the Design Bar. select Center. for Justification. 470 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . click Modify. Click OK. select Center. Under Grid 2 Pattern. Click the frame to display its grips. Under Grid 1 Pattern.

and move the roof edges as shown below. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 471 . double-click {3D}. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. double-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views. click . Add doors to the building 54 In the Project Browser. 57 In the Type Selector. 56 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building. 58 Add doors to the building as shown below. and click Cancel to end the command. click Door. 51 Right-click. under 3D Views. 52 In the Project Browser. 53 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.50 Select each roof to display its grips. 55 On the View toolbar.

59 Save and close the drawing. 472 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .

Creating Families 6 473 .

474 | Chapter 15 Creating Families .

thus the term family. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. they are still related and come from a single source. shape. each with a different size. 475 . material set. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator.About Families and the Family Editor 15 All elements in Revit Architecture 2008 are “family based. In this tutorial. Even though various types within a family can look completely different.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Architecture to help you manage your data and make changes easily. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project.

Revit Architecture has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and comprise principle building components such as walls. Standalone families include columns. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. Using the Family Editor. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Architecture recognize it as a particular component type. trees. There are. Host-based families have components that require hosts. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. however. In addition. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. exterior.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Architecture is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. The basic walls system family.rfa extension. In this lesson. transfer them from one project to another. has wall types that define interior. such as a dome roof. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. exceptions to this rule. and roofs are examples of these types of families. and partition wall styles. You also learn about the Family Editor. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. but you cannot create new system families. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. generic. and furniture. because there is only one file to track. For example. 476 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . for example. while many more are stored in component libraries. floors. You can load them into projects. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . and save them from a project file to your library if needed. Walls. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. This makes file management much easier. and roofs. floors. and when and how to use it. foundation.rfa extension.

The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. you learned about the different types of Revit Architecture families and when to use them. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. You create in-place families only within the current project. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. In this section. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. and when to use it. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. if you change the original family. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. custom wall treatments. you learn about the Family Editor. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. it is saved with the project. elevation. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. and also a standalone furniture family component. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. 2 On the File menu. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. However. or you can load it using the Load From Library. for example. To add a family to your project. you can drag it into the document window. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. how to access it. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. Introduction to the Family Editor | 477 . After the family has been loaded in the project. Load Family command on the File menu. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. such as plan. In the final exercise. or 3D.

2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. you can double-click any file with an . 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. When the family opens. select the appropriate template. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. 4 If you can’t find the component you require.In this exercise. and then load it into the project. how to access it. 9 Save the newly-defined family. if you have exhausted your external resources. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. you learn when to use the Family Editor. it opens within the Family Editor. To start a new family. Within the Windows® environment. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. open it in the Family Editor. navigate to a family file.rfa extension and it will open Revit Architecture in the Family Editor. 5 Finally. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. it should be available within the Type Selector. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. 478 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . and click Open. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. such as newsgroups. consider checking the web library and other web resources. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. 3 Next. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. you can click File ➤ Open. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. With Revit Architecture open. If you find a close match. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. presume it is a bay window that you require. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. In this case. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. and click Open. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. modify it as needed.

you learn how to create specific Revit Architecture 2008 families. 479 . Using the installed templates.Creating Components in the Family Editor 16 In this tutorial. not within the Family Editor. In addition. When you create an in-place family. you learn how to create a different type of component. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. a lighting fixture. You create a furniture family. you create an in-place family. In each lesson. you create it within the project file. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. and several annotation families.

Step 9: Create a single level of 2D and 3D geometry and lock it to the selected reference planes. 480 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Base and Top. Step 5: Dimension the reference planes and create parameters. and a Profile that must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. if required. tests at this point ensure that the skeleton of the family works correctly. click Finish Sketch on the Design bar. ■ ■ ■ When a void is placed on a solid. Each sketch is set to a different height. line patterns. fill patterns. Blend: A blend contains two sketches. and export settings for selected geometry. ■ Extrusion: The sketch for an extrusion must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. materials. both of which must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. line colors. Step 8: Test (flex) the family: switch between the types. use the Cut Geometry tool to create the cut. continue to incrementally add reference planes. Subcategories are used to define visibility settings. Solids and Voids are sketch based. The first line of the path defines the work plane for the profile. you can no longer select or modify an element that is not in the sketch. Revolve.Creating 3D Geometry All tools for creating 3D geometry can be accessed in the Family Design Bar. build geometry. Step 2: Define additional subcategories. The start and end angles of the revolution can be defined in the Revolution properties. You can also join the geometry of different solids with the Join Geometry tool. and Sweep. If you place the void before you add the solid. Blend. lineweight settings. it automatically cuts the solid. create different host types for testing purposes. There are four different methods to create Solid geometry and/or Void geometry in the Family Design Bar: Extrusion. Revolve: The sketch for a revolved object must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. Step 11: Test the family in a project environment. if the family includes a host. switch between the different host types. There can be more than one closed loop in the sketch but they must not touch or intersect each other. The sample below shows a start angle of 0° and an end angle of 180°. Note that no geometry is created. You can unjoin solids or cancel the cutting of a void on a solid using commands available on the Tools toolbar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Join Geometry Unjoin Geometry Cut Geometry Don’t Cut Process Overview: Creating a Family Follow this best practice process for creating a family: Step 1: Select a family template. Step 4: Create the skeleton of the family by adding reference planes in all required views. Step 7: Add 2 or more types in the Family Types dialog with different values for the parameters. Step 10: Repeat the flex procedure until reasonably complete. Step 3: Use the Element Properties dialog to define the reference planes that represent the origin of the family. and pin those reference planes. The sketches must not touch or intersect each other. Step 6: If the selected family template is a host-based template. Sweep: A sweep contains two sketches: a 2D Path that can be a closed or open. When you are in sketch mode. and test after each step. To quit the sketch mode.

3 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the existing vertical reference plane. you define the skeleton of the family with reference planes in plan and elevation views before you create geometry. select both reference planes.rft. The furniture family in this lesson has the shape of two boxes. on the Edit toolbar. Defining the Origin of a Family | 481 . therefore new reference planes are required in plan and elevation views. . verify that Defines Origin is selected for the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. and click OK. select Metric Furniture. The intersection of these reference planes now defines the origin and the insertion point of the family in plan view. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. and click Open. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Level is open. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Adding Reference Planes Next. You should name reference planes to easily identify them in all views. click Training Files. 4 Navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. You have created a new furniture family. and click OK. click 7 In the Element Properties dialog. You can control which reference planes are used as origin in the Element Properties dialog. and create one to the right. verify that Other ➤ Defines Origin is selected. 8 Using the same method. click Ref Plane. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane above the existing horizontal reference plane. and the family contains 2 reference planes in this floor plan. Select a family template 1 Close all open projects or families. and on the Options Bar. The floor plan Ref. 5 While pressing CTRL. and create one below.Defining the Origin of a Family The intersection of 2 reference planes in a view defines the origin and the insertion point of a family in a project. click to pin the reference planes. NOTE The direction of the reference planes is not important. 6 Select the horizontal reference plane named Center (Front/Back).

on the Options Bar. and click OK. 482 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .4 Click Modify. click . 6 In the Element Properties dialog. You name reference planes so that you can identify them in different views. enter Left. for Identity Data ➤ Name. Name reference planes 5 Select the left reference plane and.

2 In the Element Properties dialog. The reference plane allows minor strength snapping. The reference allows minor strength snapping. Front. top). These are predefined system priorities that define a direction (for example. for Other ➤ Is Reference. but cannot be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes | 483 . Weak Reference Strong Reference Directional References According to these rules. If a reference plane defines the left edge of a family. The reference does not snap and shows no shape handles. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. The priority is specified as the Is Reference value in the Element Properties dialog for the reference plane. use Left for the Is Reference value. Is Reference Value Not a Reference Definition The reference plane can be used in a family. and click OK. name the other reference planes Right. 1 Select the Left reference plane. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes Revit Architecture includes several predefined priorities that you can apply to a reference plane. right. as shown. and Back. When you dimension a family and a strong and a weak reference are close together. and on the Options Bar. left.7 Using the same method. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. These behave the same as strong references. define the priorities of the reference planes you have created. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. click . the strong reference is always captured first. select Left.

For Group parameter under. Width. enter 300mm. Click the temporary dimension. specify the Is Reference value to correspond to the name of each reference plane (Right. Repeat for the other reference plane. enter Length. We want drive Length. and Height as parameters of the furniture family. and press ENTER. Click the temporary dimension. 2 Dimension the vertical reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. Click OK. Front. 6 Select the dimension line. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. enter 750mm. and Back). 5 Click Modify. for Name. and press ENTER. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select Add Parameter. 7 On the Options Bar. and click above the planes to place the dimension. for Label. 1 Dimension the horizontal reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. Repeat for the other reference plane. The dimension can have a fixed value or can be driven by a parameter. 484 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dimensioning Reference Planes The dimension controls the behavior of the location of reference planes. click Dimension.3 Using the same method. select Dimensions. 4 Select the Left reference plane and the Right reference plane. Note that the Length parameter has been added to the dimension string.

12 Using the same method. dimension the outer horizontal reference planes with the Width parameter. 11 Click each of the vertical reference planes. click to place the dimension. and click the EQ symbol above the dimension. click Dimension. Add a multi-segment dimension 10 On the Design Bar. dimension the horizontal reference planes. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 485 .9 Using the same method.

15 Using the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. but do not appear in the project. you need to specify the Is Reference values. name them Base Left. Position and dimension the 4 new reference planes with a fixed distance from the outer reference planes.Add base reference planes 13 On the Design Bar. 486 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and Base Back. and click OK. and click . 14 Create 2 horizontal reference planes and 2 vertical reference planes within the existing outer reference planes. Now the reference planes can be used in the family. for Other ➤ Is Reference. and press ENTER. click Ref Plane. click the base reference planes. 18 Click the Base Left reference plane. select Not a Reference. 16 While pressing CTRL. Base Front. enter 50mm for the left temporary dimension. Because the base planes should not be used as a reference for dimensions or alignments. Base Right.

position the remaining new reference planes. 20 On the Design Bar. and lock the dimension. 21 Select the Left and Base Left reference planes. click Dimension. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 487 .19 Using the same method.

488 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 25 Create 2 horizontal reference planes above the existing horizontal reference plane. Under Is Reference. By default. The front view displays. you add a reference plane and the Height parameter of the family in the Front view. and click 27 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 24 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. and lock the dimensions. under Elevations.22 Using the same method. 23 In the Project Browser. Next. select Not a Reference. 26 Select the middle reference plane. 28 Change the lower temporary dimension to 150mm. double-click Front. and section views. the family contains a level and a reference plane that defines the origin of the family in the elevation view. Make sure that you use consistent views to add dimensions. You can dimension reference planes in plan. enter Base Bottom. For Identity Data ➤ Name. Click OK. dimension all other reference planes for the base with the outer reference planes. elevation.

Click OK. select Dimensions. select Add Parameter. and save the file as Cabinet. Click OK. navigate to Training/Metric/Families. 36 Click Modify. click 31 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . enter Top. In the next exercise. for Name. 32 On the Design Bar. The basic skeleton of the furniture family is completed. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click to place the dimension. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 489 . you create 2 types of the family in the Family Types dialog. 35 Dimension the lower reference plane and the Top reference plane. enter Height.rfa. on the Options Bar. click Dimension. Under Is Reference. 33 Select the lower reference plane and the Base Bottom reference plane. 38 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 30 With the top reference plane still selected. 37 Select the last dimension added. For Identity Data ➤ Name. for Label. select Top. 34 Lock the dimension. Under Group parameter under.29 Select the top reference plane and change the temporary dimension to 1450mm.

for Height. and click OK. clicking OK adjusts the geometry and closes the dialog. For Length. Family types are also a good way to test your family for correct behavior. Note that the reference planes and the dimensions adjust according to the entered values. for Name. 6 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. under Family Types. double-click Ref. enter 1000. When a family is loaded in a project. 9 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 8 Using the same method. enter 1800. Family types allow you to predefine variations of a family. create a new type named 800 x 1000 x 1800.Managing Family Parameters and Family Types Parameters and their values can be managed in the Family Types dialog. under Floor plans. NOTE In the Family Types dialog. enter 800. 10 Click Apply. 3 In the Family Types dialog. for Width. enter 1000. click Family Types. 5 Using the same method. click New. 11 Click OK. enter 600 x 1500 x 1600. create a new type named 1000 x 2000 x 2800. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and dimensions are specified. each type is represented with selected parameters. for Width. 490 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . parameters. 4 In the Name dialog. Best practice is to perform the first tests when the reference planes. Level. enter 2800. click in the titlebar of the Family Types dialog and drag it so that both the dialog and the drawing area are visible. clicking Apply adjusts the geometry without closing the dialog. NOTE In order to see changes applied to the reference planes. For Length. 7 Click Apply. but no geometry has been added. the types defined in the family editor appear in the project. for Height. enter 2000. Note that the name of the type you have created is displayed in the Name selection box at the top of the dialog. check the family as often as possible by switching between different types.

you only need to lock the top and bottom edges of the solid geometry. Level. You constrain the extrusions to the reference planes you created in previous exercises. you use extrusions to model the solid geometry of a cabinet family. Locking edges of solid/void forms: In elevation view. 2 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. A work plane is a planar surface on which you can add sketch lines or others components. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Make sure that you have set an appropriate work plane when you create 2D or 3D geometry in your family. In that case. Defining Work Planes Any solid/void form is created on a work plane. and click Edit Work Plane on the Options bar. create an extrusion from the plan view. select the geometry. In such an instance. The Family Editor offers multiple tools to set a work plane current: Define a work plane before adding geometry: Using the Work Plane dialog. there is an option on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar to Set Work Plane. Lock geometry to reference planes | 491 . Creating Geometry In this lesson. Because you lock the planar edges in plan view. edges of a solid form can also be locked to reference planes. This option will display the Work Plane dialog. Reference planes have the ability to define a work plane if they are named. Sketch an extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. you access the Work Plane dialog by clicking (Plane) on the Tools toolbar. Change a work plane for existing geometry: You can also use the Work Plane dialog to change the work plane for existing geometry in a drawing. Creating Solid Forms Use the simplest form to create solid geometry for a furniture family. where you can define the plane. Define a work plane in sketch mode: While in sketch mode. double-click Ref. you can select a named reference plane or define a work plane by picking a plane or a line in the drawing area before you sketch geometry.Lock geometry to reference planes Locking sketch lines: Lines of a sketch can be locked to a reference plane in plan view to ensure that the edge of the solid is maintained if the dimension of the reference plane changes.

the extrusion is changed accordingly in plan view. click . 4 Sketch the rectangle directly on the outer reference planes. An example of sketch lines drawn off of reference planes An example of sketch lines aligned on the desired reference plane 492 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . When the setup is more complex. NOTE Only sketch directly on the desired reference planes when the situation is clearly arranged. do not sketch directly on the reference planes. The sketch of the extrusion is now locked to the outer reference planes in plan view. 6 On the Sketch tab. with multiple reference planes or when you need to sketch with the Line tool. You can use the Align tool to align the sketch lines with the desired reference planes.3 On the Options Bar. 5 Lock each line of the sketch with the reference plane. click Finish Sketch. When the parameters Length and Width change.

and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. 8 On the Options Bar. click (Align). NOTE You can also drag the top edge of the solid geometry with the extrusion shape handle to the top reference plane and lock it.Adjust extrusion height 7 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. double-click Front. 10 Lock the dimension. 9 Select the Top reference plane as the alignment reference. Creating Solid Forms | 493 .

under Elevations. clear Plan/RCP. double-click Front. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. 17 In the Project Browser. 20 Click Modify. click . double-click Ref. Create the base geometry 12 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 Sketch the rectangle directly on the reference planes for the base (the inner reference planes). 494 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Level. 14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 18 On the Tools toolbar. click Visibility. under Floor Plans. 21 Click the base geometry and on the Options Bar. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. 23 Save the file. click Finish Sketch. and lock all the sketch lines with the reference planes. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 19 Select the Base Bottom reference plane as the alignment reference. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.11 Align the bottom of the extrusion to the Base Bottom reference plane and lock the dimension. under View Specific Display. The base should display only in elevation and 3D views.

They are view direction specific. as the current displayed detail level is Coarse. 4 On the Design Bar. For the furniture family. they show only in views that are parallel to their creation view. Model lines and symbolic lines can also be constrained to reference planes. 1 In the Project Browser. elevation. the lines need to appear in medium and fine detail levels. the software automatically creates the correct plan. The lines display again. and click OK. lines need to be added as symbolic illustration in plan views. Symbolic lines: these can be added in plan. 2 While pressing CTRL.Creating 2D Geometry You can create families using 3D and 2D geometry. elevation. 9 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. select both lines and. 7 Draw a symbolic line from the lower left corner to the top right corner. and lock the geometry. select the symbolic line. The lines are greyed out. verify that the Line tool is active. clear Coarse. There are 2 methods for adding 2D geometry available from the Family tab of the Design Bar: Model lines: these can be added in all views. and click Apply. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and lock the geometry. 10 On the View Control Bar. 6 Draw a line from the top left corner of the reference planes to the lower right corner. select the base geometry and the furniture geometry. use model lines to display additional lines in the 3D view of the family. but not in coarse. Creating 2D Geometry | 495 . When you use 3D geometry. Level. 14 On the View Control Bar. 8 While pressing CTRL. NOTE You have to exit Symbolic Line mode to lock the geometry. and click the locks to create the constraint. 13 Click OK. click Family Types. double-click Ref. 3 On the View Control Bar. 12 In the Family Types dialog. For example. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. click Symbolic Lines. on the Options Bar. under Floor plans. 5 On the Options Bar. select a different family type. The family geometry should change each time you apply a different type. Click Modify. By design. under Detail Levels. and section views of the family. and section views. Hiding the existing solid geometry before you create the symbolic lines helps you create the lines on the intersections of the reference planes. Test the family 11 On the Design Bar. click Visibility. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

Loading a Family into a Project Families can be loaded directly from the family editor into selected open projects. double-click View 1. 3 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Save a 3D view 1 In the Project Browser. 496 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The last view creates the thumbnail view of the family. set a 3D view of the family current. 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Save View.The geometry of the furniture family is complete. 5 Save the file. under 3D views. This opens a predefined 3D view. Before you save the family.

click (3D). If required. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. click Load into Projects. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door.rfa 3D View: View 1 to switch to the family. 13 Close all open projects or families. All the family types you created are listed as options. you can create additional types with different dimensions in a project. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Door Family | 497 . this view is maintained when the family is opened again. Create a project 6 On the Standard toolbar. drag each of the types into the drawing area. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. expand Families ➤ Furniture ➤ Cabinet. 12 On the Views toolbar. 11 Click Modify. You can press SPACE to change the orientation of the type. under Cabinet. Creating a Door Family In this lesson. 9 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. and click to place them. The family is loaded into the new project. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Cabinet. click .NOTE If you save the family in a 3D view different than the default {3D} view and if you have saved the orientation of your view.

You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. height. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.rft. The door type has a variable height and width. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. 498 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door. and thickness.

Labelled dimensions. Level. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 499 . Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Window menu. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. select Doors [projection]. click . are also displayed. and represent the door opening profile. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. Notice the four tiled views. click Tile. click Symbolic Lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.4 On the View menu. Floor Plan: Ref. 7 Enter ZF. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. 6 Maximize the window. part of the door properties. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit.

click Dimension. 500 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown.

Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. select Thickness for Label. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 501 . 17 On the Options Bar. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. select Width for Label. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. click Modify.

you first specify the arc center. 22 In the Type selector. then you specify each end point. 21 On the Design Bar. select Plan Swing [cut]. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. and select the command from the menu. 24 Enter SI. 23 On the Options Bar. When drawing an arc from center and end points. along with the witness line controls. click . as shown. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. click the down arrow button. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. In the image below. 502 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Symbolic Lines.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point.

3 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. under Specify a new Work Plane. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 503 . under Elevations. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. enter 50 mm for Depth. click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. double-click Exterior. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 503. and click .

9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. double-click Left. click Dimension.8 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 10 On the Design Bar. 504 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . then click to specify the dimension witness line.

16 Select the door leaf extrusion. select Front/Back. under Floor Plans. click Modify and select the dimension.12 On the Design Bar. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. and Fine are selected. Left/Right. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 505 . Level. 19 Under Detail Levels. click Visibility. select Thickness for Label. and When cut in Plan/RCP. and click OK. click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. double-click Ref. Medium. under View Specific Display. verify that Coarse. and clear Plan/RCP. 14 In the Project Browser.

“Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 506.Dark. select Oak Door. click . The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 506 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. 7 In the Materials dialog. 2 In the Materials dialog. for Material. 13 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. and click OK. and click OK. under AccuRender. click 17 In the Materials dialog. 15 On the Options Bar.No Gloss. under Materials and Finishes. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. and click OK. enter Oak Door for Name. click OK. click . Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. 16 In the Element Properties dialog.Red/Stained. click 11 In the Materials dialog. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. 4 In the Materials dialog. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.20 On the Options Bar. 3 In the New Material dialog. click Materials. select Panel for Subcategory. click OK. 6 Click OK. click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Material Library dialog. click Modify. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. for Material. 9 On the Options Bar. It also defines its appearance when rendered. click for Texture. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. select Oak Door for Name. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. you assign a material to the door leaf. click . The solid geometry of the door is now complete. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. under Name. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views.

double-click View 1. under 3D Views. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. and select Shading with Edges. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 507 .The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. click the Model Graphics Style control. under Views (all). 21 On the View Control Bar.

Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog and see how the new door reacts. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. enter 2000 mm for Height. click New. Click Apply. 3 In the Name dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. Try to move the dialog off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. In the Family Types dialog. enter 2500 mm for Height. 25 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. under Family Types. By flexing the new component. Under Other. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. 27 Click OK. Under Other. click Family Types. Enter 1000 mm for Width. and click OK. click Family Types. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 28 Proceed to the next exercise.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 508 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. “Defining New Door Types” on page 508 Defining New Door Types In this exercise.

click Door. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. 11 Click OK. Enter 1220 mm for Width. enter 2100 mm for Height. Enter 750 mm for Width. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. 5 Under Family Types. click New ➤ Project. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click Save. and click OK. 19 On the Options Bar. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. 17 Under Create new. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. enter 2134 mm for Height. 15 In the New Project dialog. Click Apply. 9 In the Name dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Open. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click New. Enter 925 mm for Width. click New. Training Door. 20 In the Open dialog. 8 Under Family Types. Defining New Door Types | 509 . enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog. select it.rte. Click Apply. 12 On the File menu. click Wall. Define the second new door type. 6 In the Name dialog.4 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. select Project.rfa. Define the third new door type. Training Door. under Template file. click Load. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Browse. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.rfa. 10 In the Family Types dialog. click Training Files. Click Apply. enter 2000 mm for Height.

click the Model Graphics Style control. click Door. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. 25 On the Design Bar. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 510 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 On the View Control Bar.23 On the View toolbar. 28 In the Type Selector. 26 In the Type Selector. and select Shading with Edges. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. click . 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown.

30 In the Type Selector. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. This completes the lesson. height. and specify values for the window width. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. Creating a Window Family | 511 . 32 You can close all files without saving. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. Finally. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. default sill height. glazing and mullions as extrusions. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. You create the window frame. and create the window sash as a sweep. Creating a Door Family. and mullion offset.

6 Two dimension strings display with their labels. 2 On the File menu. click Training Files. When you add labels to dimensions. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. is one of the type parameters. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. Height and Default Sill Height. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 4 Maximize the Elevation: Exterior view. you specify the parameters for the new window family. click New ➤ Family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. 5 Enter ZF. The label name. equally spaced vertical mullions. The window type has a variable height and width.rft. also one of the window properties. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 512 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise.

click Family Types. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 513. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. click Sketch 2D Path. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. enter 1300 mm for Height. This is the starting point for the new window. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. Change the height and width values again. and click Apply. 2 On the Design Bar. Snap the cursor to each corner. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. and click Apply. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. 4 On the Options Bar. then sketching the sweep profile. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 513 . This process is called “flexing the model. click Lines. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. 8 In the Family Types dialog. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. Enter 1800 mm for Width. 10 Click OK. 9 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 7 On the Design Bar. click . 3 On the Design Bar. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window opening.

click . click the Scale control. 10 On the View Control Bar. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. click Finish Path. and select 1:10. 14 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. select Elevation: Right. and click Open View. 11 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. click Ref Plane. 7 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 8 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Go To View dialog.6 Click the locks so the sweep is locked to the opening size. 13 On the Options Bar. click Sketch Profile. and specify an offset of 50 mm. 514 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 515 . click Modify. enter Sash for the Name. select Prefer: Wall faces. 25 Below the red dot. 21 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Lines. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. 18 On the Design Bar. and select the dimension. click . click Dimension. 20 On the Design Bar. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. Sketch the window frame profile 23 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar. 19 Drag the value control off to the side as shown.15 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. and select the reference plane. select Chain and click .

click Modify. When the lock displays. 28 Select the left edge of the frame section. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. When the lock displays. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. the exact dimensions are not critical.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. 516 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 27 Select the right edge of the frame section. However. 26 On the Design Bar. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face.

Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. as shown. TIP After adding the dimension. click Modify.29 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. and specify the dimension value. When the lock displays. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 517 . select the line you want to move. 30 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 31 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame.

34 On the Tools toolbar. 518 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Sweep. 36 On the Design Bar. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. click the lock to constrain the present value. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. Next. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. When the lock displays. zoom out until it displays. click . TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. 33 Select the 20 mm dimension. this is the top of the window opening.Modify each dimension if necessary. click the lock to constrain the present value. click Finish Profile. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 32 Select the 40 mm dimension. When the lock displays. 37 On the Design Bar.

spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. and select Lock. expand 3D Views. 38 In the Project Browser. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. and click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. and select the option. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 519 . under Views (all). Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Set Work Plane. and enter . Chain of walls or lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.45 mm for Depth. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 519. double-click Exterior. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations.The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. and double-click View 1. click . If necessary. 39 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Work Plane dialog.

and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle.50 mm for Offset.The entire sash outline is selected. click Finish Sketch. 520 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 On the Design Bar. set the following options: Click . and lock icons display on each line. You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. ■ Click . ■ ■ Enter . 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar.

Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. under Elevations. double-click Right. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 521. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. 11 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 521 . double-click View 1. The window sash extrusion is now complete. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles.10 In the Project Browser.

click Ref Plane. as shown. 522 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and enter 30 mm for Offset. 2 On the Design Bar. double-click Right.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. 3 On the Options Bar. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. click . under Elevations.

click . 14 In the Work Plane dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. enter -12 mm for Depth. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 523 . click Dimension. and click OK. double-click Exterior. 15 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. 8 Select the reference plane. and select Lock. click Modify. click . 13 On the Design Bar. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter.5 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. 17 Select each of the sash extrusion lines to create the glass boundary. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Lines. under Elevations. under Specify a new Work Plane. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. under Identity Data.

View the window model with frame. under Elevations. 23 On the Design Bar. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. After the family is loaded into a project.18 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. click Modify. double-click Right. under Identity Data. 21 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click . sash. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog. 20 Select the glass extrusion. 524 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter.

Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 1500 mm for Height. under 3D Views. 26 In the Family Types dialog. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 525 . Click Apply. click Family Types. Under Other. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. double-click View 1. Move the Family Types dialog off to the side so you can see the window model. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early.24 In the Project Browser. For example. NOTE After flexing the model. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height.

click to return the window to its original dimensions. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. under Elevations.27 Click Cancel. 28 On the Edit toolbar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 526. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. click Dimension. double-click Exterior. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. 526 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. click Ref Plane. the exact location is not critical. 29 Proceed to the next exercise.

Do not be concerned with dimension values. as shown. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal.Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 527 . as shown. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. After adding the dimension. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. Do not be concerned with dimension values.

. Under Parameter Data. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select <Add parameter. 11 On the Design Bar. Click OK. enter Mullion Offset for Name.. under Dimensions. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. Select Instance. click Family Types. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. 528 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .> for Label. select Dimensions. Under Group parameter under. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown.9 On the Options Bar. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. and click OK. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Family parameter. 12 In the Family Types dialog. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label.

As you did before. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. click Modify. enter 14 mm for Depth. click Set Work Plane. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. 20 On the Design Bar.14 Click the dimension value. and enter 350 mm as the new value. 18 On the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. and click OK. click Modify. 21 In the Work Plane dialog. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 529 . Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. However. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. 22 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. move the dimension value as shown. select Mullion Offset for Label. and click . 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. click Lines.

27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. 26 On the Design Bar. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. 530 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. Move the dimension values as shown.After you complete the sketch. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion.

select Family parameter. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Click OK. 30 On the Options Bar.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. Select Type. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 531 . and select the dimension you added in the previous step. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. Under Group parameter under. select <Add parameter> for Label. enter Mullion Width for Name. 29 On the Design Bar. select Dimensions. click Modify. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Under Parameter Data.

This is changed in later steps. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. 532 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Remember. click Family Types. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. and click Apply. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. Select the dimension.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. 35 In the Family Types dialog. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. 33 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch.

Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. Click Apply. Under Other. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. 37 Click Cancel. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. and click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. 38 On the Edit toolbar. click Set Work Plane. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog. 41 In the Work Plane dialog. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 39 On the Design Bar. or undoing the same. click to return the window to its original dimensions. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. 40 On the Design Bar. Enter 1500 mm for Width. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. evenly spaced. In this case. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 533 . select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. enter 1500 mm for Height. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. and aligned with the sash edge. NOTE After flexing the model.

534 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Do not be concerned with the dimension value. 44 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. as shown. click Modify. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. 49 On the Design Bar. 43 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. 46 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. 48 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. 47 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Design Bar. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion.42 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Lines. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. click .

Move the dimension value as shown. select Mullion Width for Label. select Mullion Width for Label. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Remember. click Finish Sketch. 51 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. ■ ■ 52 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Select the dimension. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 535 .50 On the Options Bar.

double-click View 1.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. and select the vertical mullions. Join the mullion geometry 53 On the Tools menu. If necessary. 536 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 54 Select the horizontal mullions. click Join Geometry. 55 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions.

Flex the window model 56 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you can still see the window. Under Other.Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. so when you open the Family Types dialog. 57 On the Design Bar. 58 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. click Family Types. 59 Click Cancel. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. enter 1500 mm for Height. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 537 .

4 In the Materials dialog. No Gloss. click Materials. and click OK. 9 Select the window frame sweep. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. Dark. 3 In the New Material dialog. enter Pine Frame for Name. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. 8 On the View Control Bar. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 538. under Elevations. 6 In the Materials dialog. click to return the window to its original dimensions. Yellow/. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. double-click Exterior. sash. and click OK. under AccuRender. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. 538 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you assign materials to the frame. and the mullions. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. select Stained. 2 In the Materials dialog. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. click for Texture.60 On the Edit toolbar. 5 In the Material Library dialog. sash. click Duplicate. the sash. and select Shading with Edges. click the Model Graphics Style control.

and click OK. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). verify that Coarse. and Fine are selected. under Identity Data. 13 In the Materials dialog. under View Specific Display. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click OK. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 539 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. 20 Select the glass extrusion. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. select Edit for Visibility. Medium. double-click Right. click for Material. verify that Coarse. under View Specific Display. clear the other view options. click . under Graphics. click Visibility. select Pine Frame for Name. 23 Under Detail Levels. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.10 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 21 On the Options Bar. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). double-click View 1. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. and click OK. and Fine are selected. and click OK. Medium. 16 Under Detail Levels.

you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. “Defining New Window Types” on page 540. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. sash. 540 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The window frame.25 Zoom in on a window corner. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. and glass display their assigned materials. mullions.

The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. and click Apply. In the Family Types dialog. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog. 3 In the Family Types dialog. Defining New Window Types | 541 . it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click Apply. verify that 2000 mm is specified for Height. 2 On the Design Bar. click Family Types.

and click OK. Click Apply. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1250 mm for Height. 542 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 7 In the Name dialog.The window height is doubled. enter 1000 mm for Height. under Family Types. and click Apply. click New. 8 In the Family Types dialog. verify that the following parameter values are specified: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. 5 In the Family Types dialog.

11 In the Family Types dialog. click New. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. click Load. Click OK. Click Apply. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 15 On the File menu. click Window. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width.9 Under Family Types. click Save. Enter 1300 mm for Height. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. and click OK. click to start a new project based on your default template. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. 19 On the Options Bar. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. 10 In the Name dialog. Defining New Window Types | 543 . 14 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply.rfa. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. Training Window. click New. 13 In the Name dialog. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

25 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Design Bar. 544 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 32 On the View menu. 33 Zoom in on the center window. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. and select Shading with Edges. Notice the detail that displays. click . This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. clear Tag on Placement.20 In the Open dialog. and click Open. click Thin Lines. click the Model Graphics Style control. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. click Window. navigate to the location of your Training Window. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. click Wall.rfa file. 24 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. 34 On the View toolbar. select it. 27 In the Type Selector. 35 On the View Control Bar. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. click Modify. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector.

This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. that each family in a project can have a different value for an instance parameter. Creating solid geometry: Based on the 4 ways to create solid geometry in Revit Architecture (Solid Extrusion. Model lines are displayed in every view. A large number of parameters reduce the performance of the family. line patterns. Solid geometry: Use solid geometry as often as possible to represent a family because it automatically gives you the correct plan. Creating a Complex Model Family In the following exercises. where symbolic lines are view direction specific: they show only in views that are parallel to the view where they have been created. Solid Sweep) you can decide in which view you start to create your solid geometry. Solid Revolve. Planning a Complex Model Family Before you start to create a complex model family. The window family includes nested families for the outer sill and uses shared parameters for evaluation purposes. Basically. Instance parameter means. elevation. model lines. where type parameters drive the geometry for each family type. line colors. you plan. Linework: You can create model lines and symbolic lines in a family. a parameter drives geometry in a family. Parameters: You should carefully define the parameters in a family. For example. and materials of the subcategories. and section views of a family. ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a Complex Model Family | 545 . You can also switch on/off selected subcategories in a project. Formulas between parameters drive the behavior of parts of the family. This allows you to drive lineweights. the easiest way to create a window frame is to create an extrusion including two rectangles for the frame edges in an elevation view of the family. Revit Architecture allows you to specify a parameter as instance or type parameter. and symbolic lines are usually assigned to selected Subcategories.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. you should sketch the design of the family and make notes of the desired behavior: ■ Subcategories: Solid geometry. sketch. Solid Blend. and create a complex window family with a complex opening.

and Elevation views. you can use a parameter with the Parameter Data Type Yes / No. Level of detail: Revit Architecture allows you specify the visibility of each solid form and line geometry for the Detail Levels Coarse.■ Scheduling/exporting parameters: Revit Architecture differs between different parameter types. ■ Visibility settings: If specific visibility settings are required for selected geometry or linework. A Family parameter does only appear in the family itself. By family type: Each type of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. By instance: Each single instance of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. Section. Various parameters drive the behavior of the family. Medium and Fine. Assigning material: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Directly: The solid geometry in the family has material explicitly assigned. where a Shared parameter can appear in schedule and tags and can be exported to ODBC. Sketching the requirements The window family should be modelled with different detail levels in Plan. you should define different widths for each of the casements. 546 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Detail Level View Plan Coarse Medium Fine Section Elevation Additionally. and should account for instances when either of the casements is toggled off. By category: The solid material gets its material from the selected category or subcategory in a project.

The family editor is opened with a new window family.The window contains the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A: Insertion depth B: Frame depth C: Frame width D: Sash width E: Center post width F: Wall offset G: Left width H: Right width I: Width J: Wall offset top K: Top frame height L: Bottom frame height M: Height Outer sill: ■ ■ ■ Fixed front height: 30mm Fixed back height: 50mm Fixed offset: 30mm ■ Glass fixed width: 20mm Selecting a Family Template In this exercise. Selecting a Family Template | 547 . you open a template that you use as the basis for the complex window family. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click Open. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. One test scenario consists in switching between the wall types with different thicknesses to check whether the constraints work correctly. You should test your family often as you incrementally build geometry in the next steps. navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. select Metric Window. 1 Close all open projects or families. The family template uses a wall as host. create a second wall type with a different wall thickness so that you can test the family.rft. click Training Files.

. 10 Click OK 3 times. so you model the new opening first. 5 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. click Ref Plane. under Other. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. for Is Reference. for Structure ➤ Thickness. Click OK.4 Select the wall. 9 In the Edit Assembly dialog. . ■ ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. 9 Click Modify. click . Verify that Defines Origin is selected. 548 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click . This requires that the standard rectangular opening be deleted and replaced with voids cut out from the default wall. Create reference planes for the opening 6 On the Design Bar. enter 400. 7 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Left reference plane. for Name. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. click 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Switch back to the previous wall settings: ■ ■ Select the wall. select Wall Closure. accept the default name. enter Insertion Edge. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening The window contains a more complex wall opening than a standard rectangular opening. 7 In the Name dialog. refer to the command line to verify what is selected. click Edit/New. in the Edit toolbar. This means that the exterior wall layers that have wraps assigned will end at this reference plane. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Construction. for Construction ➤ Structure. click Duplicate. In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. Prepare the centered reference planes 1 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. and click OK. select Weak Reference. and on the Options Bar. 3 Select the horizontal reference plane. click Edit. Under Other. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Right reference plane. click 2 In the Element Properties dialog. select Basic Wall : Wall 1. select Defines Origin. and click OK.

enter Insertion Depth. on the Options Bar. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. For Group parameter under. Dimension horizontal reference planes 15 On the Design Bar. The horizontal reference plane defines the inner edge and the new vertical reference planes define the left and right edges of the wall offset for the opening. click Dimension. This parameter is defined as an instance parameter. 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. for Label. 19 Select the dimension. you can more easily select it because it doesn’t overlap with other elements in the drawing. because each inserted value should have a different insertion depth. 14 Using the same method. dimension the vertical reference planes. 18 Select the Exterior reference plane. click Dimension. drag the Interior horizontal reference plane to the left side. name the other new reference plane Wall Offset Right. 17 Click Modify. Click OK. use the blue circle grip to drag the left edge of the reference plane to line up with the left side of the Insertion Edge reference plane. enter 75.10 Select the first reference plane you created. 12 Using the same method. select Constraints. Dimension vertical reference planes 21 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Wall Offset Left. for Identity Data ➤ Name. for the temporary dimension. and click . Next. 13 Select the Exterior horizontal reference plane on the top wall edge. refer to the status bar to verify what is selected. and select Instance. and click OK. 22 Dimension the Left and Wall Offset Left vertical reference planes. 16 Dimension the Exterior and Insertion Edge horizontal reference planes. select Add Parameter. for Name. 23 Click Modify. By extending the reference pane. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening | 549 .

30 On the Design Bar. Click OK. for Label.24 Select the Wall Offset Left reference plane. for the temporary dimension. click Ref Plane. 37 Select the Wall Offset Top reference plane. select Construction. Next. select Add Parameter. and press ENTER. 28 Select the dimension. For Group parameter under. select Add Parameter. for Name. For Group parameter under. on the Options Bar. 35 On the Design Bar. you apply the same method to reference planes in an elevation view. 39 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select Construction. 550 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Wall Offset. dimension the Right and Wall Offset Right reference planes. for Identity Data ➤ Name. 38 Select the dimension. enter 100. Click OK. enter Wall Offset Top. Dimension reference planes in elevation 29 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. and click OK. under Elevations. 31 Create a horizontal reference plane below the Head reference plane. for Name. double-click Exterior. 32 Click Modify. The reference planes and parameters for the plan view are defined. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 Select the dimension. enter Wall Offset Top. for the temporary dimension. enter 100. and click . 33 Select the new reference plane. select Wall Offset. for Label. The skeleton for the opening is complete. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. on the Options Bar. 36 Dimension the Head and Wall Offset Top reference planes. for Label. click Dimension. 27 Using the same method.

NOTE Zoom in as necessary so that the rectangle does not snap to reference planes. select Reference Plane : Sill. 7 Select the Exterior reference plane. Wall Offset Left.rfa. for Name. 6 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). Level. 4 On the Design Bar.40 Save the file as Casement Window. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 2 On the Tools toolbar. select the top edge of the sketch. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. double-click Ref. click . and sketch the extrusion as shown. and lock the alignment. click (Plane). Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 551 . 8 Using the same method. under Specify a new Work Plane. 5 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. lock the other sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. and Wall Offset Right reference planes. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening You model the opening with voids that are cut from the wall geometry. under Floor Plans.

In order to use the voids as a new opening. 17 Select the left vertical edge of the default opening (Opening Cut). align and constrain the top and bottom edges of the other void to the Head and Sill reference planes. double-click Exterior. and lock the alignment. and lock the alignment. click Finish Sketch. Lock the sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. 13 Align the top edge of the smaller void to the Wall Offset Top reference plane. click (3D). 552 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Interior. you need to delete the standard rectangular opening cut. NOTE Create the void extrusion directly below the one you just created. the voids need to be cut from the wall geometry. and press DELETE. 16 On the Views toolbar. Right. 14 Align the bottom edge of the smaller void to the Sill reference plane. under Elevations. and Left reference planes. 11 In the Project Browser. click (Align). 12 On the Tools toolbar. create and constrain a void extrusion for the inner part of the opening as shown. 10 Using the same method. 15 Using the same method. Also.9 On the Design Bar.

The first void is cut from the wall. Next. you control correct behavior of the new wall opening by changing the wall offset parameters. 20 Using the same method. click (Cut Geometry).The opening in the wall is deleted. and then select the wall geometry. 18 On the Tools toolbar. cut the second void from the wall. 19 Select the void. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 553 .

Click OK. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Wall Offset Right reference plane. 5 On the Design Bar. enter 50mm. 7 Select the Frame Left reference plane. select Not a Reference. enter 50mm. 554 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for the temporary dimension. click Dimension. For Other ➤ Is Reference. and click . 22 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Construction ➤ Wall Offset Top. 6 Dimension the Left and Frame Left vertical reference planes. You can also test the opening by flexing the wall types and thicknesses. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the reference plane. 2 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Wall Offset Left reference plane. For Wall Offset.Change wall offset parameters 21 On the Design Bar. double-click Ref. enter 100mm. under Floor Plans. Creating Window Frame Geometry The reference planes and parameters for the window frame are defined in the plan and exterior elevation views. click Family Types. 3 Select the reference plane. Level. enter Frame Left. Note that the opening has changed correctly. Click OK. For Identity Data ➤ Name.

11 On the Design Bar. 12 Dimension the Right and Frame Right vertical reference planes. 13 Select the Frame Right reference plane. for Name. select Add Parameter. enter Frame Width. for Label. 14 Select the right dimension. 16 Select the left dimension. enter 100mm. For Group parameter under.10 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. for Label. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. create a horizontal reference plane below the Insertion Edge reference plane. select Not a Reference. on the Options Bar. select Frame Width. Click OK. click Dimension. for the temporary dimension. 17 Using the same method. and create a Frame Depth type parameter dimension as shown. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 555 . on the Options Bar. enter Frame Right. select Construction. Click OK. name it Frame Interior. For Other ➤ Is Reference.

556 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and create a Center Post Width type parameter dimension. name the reference planes Center Post Left and Center Post Right. The exact vertical position of the reference planes is not important. NOTE The positioning of the center post will be specified later in the exercise. 19 Using the same method used previously.18 Create 2 more vertical reference planes to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. dimension the planes at 120mm.

select Add Parameter. for the temporary dimension. double-click Exterior. For Group parameter under. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name.Create parameters in elevation 20 In the Project Browser. enter 150mm. 26 Select the Frame Bottom reference plane. on the Options Bar. name it Frame Top. under Elevations. and dimension the Head and Frame Top reference planes at 150mm. 24 On the Design Bar. select Construction. create a horizontal reference plane below the Wall Offset Top reference plane. enter Frame Height Top. and click 23 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 22 Select the reference plane. select Construction. 25 Dimension the Sill and Frame Bottom horizontal reference planes. For Group parameter under. For Identity Data ➤ Name. for Label. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 30 Select the other dimension. 27 Using the same method. Click OK. click Dimension. select Add Parameter. 28 Select the lower dimension. enter Frame Height Bottom. For Other ➤ Is Reference. Click OK. on the Options Bar. select Not a Reference. Click OK. for Label. enter Frame Bottom. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 557 . 21 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Sill reference plane.

enter 1500mm. enter 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 and Click OK. add 2 window types with different parameters to check whether the parameters work correctly. 558 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 100mm. 36 Under Family Types. enter 100mm. enter 100mm. Create family types 32 On the Design Bar. For Frame Height Bottom. enter 60mm. enter 50mm. for Wall Offset Top. click Family Types. 35 In the Name dialog. 33 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Under Construction. enter 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. enter 80mm. Under Other. enter 50mm. Under Construction. enter 50mm. For Wall Offset. You create 2 family types for the Casement Window family. enter 70mm. For Frame Width. for Insertion Depth.The skeleton of the window frame is complete. click New. and click OK. enter 2000mm. enter 80mm. instance parameters can be changed on an instance level for each inserted window instance. for Frame Depth. click New. For Width. enter 80mm. For Frame Width. for Insertion Depth. Before you model the frame geometry. Additional values for new parameters will be set continuously after each reasonable step of completeness. enter 100mm. for Height. 34 Under Family Types. 37 In the Name dialog. for Wall Offset Top. 38 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. For Frame Height Top. For Center Post Width. Family types allow you to set different values for parameters and to save this state as a specific type of the window family. For Wall Offset. A family type manages type parameters only. Under Dimensions.

select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. under Specify a new Work Plane. 45 On the Tools toolbar. For Width. and lock the alignments to create a constraint for all edges as shown. click (Plane). enter 120mm. and click OK. Frame Bottom. 43 On the Design Bar. enter 70mm. Model frame geometry 41 On the Tools toolbar. for Name. and a third rectangle outside the intersection of the reference planes. and click OK. one on the right. For Center Post Width. 46 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. For Frame Height Bottom. Rectangle position in view Left Right Outside (larger rectangle) Lock to reference planes Frame Top. select Reference Plane : Frame Interior. Under Other. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimensions. Frame Left. Center Post Right. 42 In the Work Plane dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Frame Height Top. enter 1400mm. Frame Bottom. for Frame Depth. 40 Under Name. enter 80mm. Head. Under Dimensions. and sketch the extrusion with 3 rectangles as shown. Right. 44 On the Options Bar. Left Creating Window Frame Geometry | 559 . for Height. enter 120mm. Frame Top. Center Post Left. enter 1500mm. 39 Click Apply. Sill. NOTE Create 3 rectangles: One on the left. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click . NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. Frame Right. click (Align).

51 Click Modify. 48 In the Project Browser. The window frame is complete. 49 On the Tools toolbar. Under Detail Levels.47 On the Design Bar. 560 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Frame material will be assigned later in the tutorial. clear Coarse. under Floor Plans. 52 On the Views toolbar. 56 Click OK twice. and lock the alignment. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. 55 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. double-click Ref. click (3D). select Frame/Mullion. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Finish Sketch. Level. . and lock the alignment. 57 On the View Control Bar. click Edit. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. 53 Select the extrusion solid geometry. For Graphics ➤ Visibility/Graphics Overrides. clear Plan/RCP. click 50 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align).

and click 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . However. 3 On the Views toolbar. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. click Family Types. and click OK. click Scale ➤ 1:10. you model each sash separately. 4 Create 4 vertical reference planes as shown. under Floor Plans. enter Sash Left Left. Define parameters in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. For Identity Data ➤ Name. Changing the scale makes it easier to work in detail. Defining the Window Sash Parameters You use known modelling procedures to create the geometry for the window sash. double-click Ref. under Name. 59 In the Family Types dialog.Test the family again 58 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Level. click (Thin Lines) to work with heavier lineweights. 5 Select the leftmost reference plane you just created. and click Apply. 2 On the View Control Bar. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 561 . 60 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. because the visibility settings are different for the left and right sashes.

16 Select the reference plane. add parameters to the remaining dimensions. double-click Exterior. For Group parameter under. and click 17 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 14 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Frame Bottom reference plane. 7 Using the same method. 562 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click OK. enter Sash Bottom. 9 Select the left dimension. on the Options Bar. You can drag dimension text to the left or right side using the Drag Text grip. 15 Click Modify. 11 Select the next dimension. select Not a Reference. select Add Parameter. enter Sash Width. 18 On the Design Bar.■ ■ For Other ➤ Is Reference. for Label. on the Options Bar. For Other ➤ Is Reference. specify each dimension as 50mm. select Sash Width. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. select Not a Reference. specify the properties for the remaining new reference planes. Click OK. select Construction. for Label. under Elevations. 12 Using the same method. Click OK. working from left to right: Reference Plane 2 3 4 Properties Name: Sash Left Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Left Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference 8 Dimension the reference planes with adjacent reference planes for the window frame as shown. Define parameters in elevation view 13 In the Project Browser. click Dimension.

click . and sketch 2 rectangles to form the right sash extrusion as shown. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. for Label. select Sash Width. 22 Select the Sash Top reference plane. for the temporary dimension. extend the 2 window types with different values for the new parameter to check whether the parameter work correctly. 20 Select the Sash Bottom reference plane. click Family Types. 28 For Name. 27 Click Apply. for Sash Width. 24 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. enter 70mm.19 Dimension the Frame Bottom and Sash Bottom reference planes. The skeleton of the window sash is complete. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimension. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 563 . 23 While pressing CTRL. 32 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. 31 On the Tools toolbar. enter 50mm. select both dimensions. and lock the alignment to create a constraint for all edges as shown. Before you model the sash geometry. and click OK. enter 50mm. Specify it as Not a Reference. 21 Using the same method. 26 Under Construction. click (Align). for the temporary dimension. on the Options Bar. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. Dimension the Frame Top and Sash Top reference planes. create a horizontal reference plane below the Frame Top reference plane: ■ ■ ■ Name it Sash Top. 25 For Name. 30 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Create solid extrusions 29 On the Design Bar.

NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. enter 1500. double-click Ref. 33 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. for Extents ➤ View Range. switch to the Exterior Elevation view and create the solid extrusion for the left sash. click Finish Sketch. and click OK twice. 41 Using the same method. NOTE Modifying the cut plane offset value allows you to see the sash extrusion in the view. 38 On the Tools toolbar. Frame Right. 564 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Edit. Frame Bottom. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. Level. Sash Top. 43 On the Views toolbar. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. click (3D). Sash Bottom. under Floor Plans. and lock the alignment. click 39 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). 42 Switch back to the Ref. Sash Right Right. for Cut plane ➤ Offset. 35 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Center Post Right. 34 In the Project Browser. 37 In the View Range dialog. and lock the alignment. Rectangle position in view Outside Inside Lock to reference planes Frame Top. 40 Click Modify. Level floor plan view to align the edges as you did for the right sash. Sash Right Left. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane.

For Group Parameter under. select Construction. 1 Select the right solid geometry of the window sash. 47 Click OK twice. clear Plan/RCP. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 5 Click OK 3 times. Defining Visibility Parameters | 565 . create a visibility parameter for the left sash named Sash Left. click Edit. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 46 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. and click . clear Coarse.44 While pressing CTRL. click Family Types. 6 Using the same method. note the parameters you have just created with checkboxes in the Value column. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. Defining Visibility Parameters You add visibility parameters so that you can display the left and right sashes separately. enter Sash Right. and click 45 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ . For Graphics ➤ Visibility. select Frame/Mullion. Under Detail Levels. 3 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click the rectangular button on the right side. select the 2 extrusions. click Add parameter. 7 On the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Visible.

Glass Axis. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 5 On the Design Bar. and Frame Interior reference planes. dimension the Insertion Edge. This is because the glass width and height will be extended to the window frame if the sash is switched off. 7 Click EQ to center the reference plane for the glass axis between the reference planes for the window frame. click Dimension. double-click Ref. Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry The glass geometry will be dimensioned directly in the sketch. and name them Glass Axis Right. 6 Using one dimension string. Click OK. enter Glass Axis. 9 Create 3 more reference planes as shown. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . and Glass Axis Horizontal. 8 In the Project Browser. select Not a Reference. Level. 9 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. and click Apply. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Any 3D geometry assigned to a Yes/No parameter is still visible in the family editor. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane between the Insertion Edge and Frame Interior reference planes. under Floor Plans. double-click Exterior. The glass is located in the center of the frame / sash with a fixed thickness of 20mm. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. Glass Axis Left. For Identity Data ➤ Name. the geometry is only greyed out if the visibility parameter is not assigned. 10 Under Construction. clear Sash Left. 566 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 Select the reference plane. under Elevations. and click OK.Test the family 8 For Name. not aligned to reference planes.

You create parameters that define the dimensions of the glass geometry. and click OK. create EQ dimensions with the adjacent sash reference planes. select Reference Plane : Glass Axis. under Specify a new Work Plane. click . 2 In the Work Plane dialog. Creating the Glass Geometry In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating the Glass Geometry | 567 . click (Plane). This centers the glass reference planes between the window sashes. Sketch the right glass extrusion 1 On the Tools toolbar. for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and sketch the right glass extrusion as shown. you use extrusions to create the glass for the complex window family.10 For each of the new reference planes.

dimension the left edge of the sketch. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. For Group Parameter under. 10 Dimension the left edge and right edge of the sketch. dimension the top and the bottom of the sketch. on the Options Bar. and the right edge of the sketch. 6 Using one dimension string. select Add Parameter. Click OK. select Other. 568 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Using the same method. enter Glass Length Right. the Glass Axis Right reference plane. and create a Glass Height Right parameter. 11 Select the dimension line and. 7 Click EQ. 8 Using the same method. click Dimension. click Dimension. dimension the top and bottom edge of the sketch. for Label.Dimension the sketch 5 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

Assign properties 15 Select the glass geometry. Creating the Glass Geometry | 569 . For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. select Glass. enter 10. click (3D). and click 16 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Under Detail Levels. click Finish Sketch. clear Coarse. create the glass geometry for the left sash with the new parameters Glass Height Left and Glass Length Left. For Constraints ➤ Extrusion End. 17 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. enter -10.0. clear Plan/RCP.0. click Edit. 18 Click OK twice. 21 On the Views toolbar. 20 Assign the same Element properties to the left extrusion that you assigned to the right. For Extrusion Start.14 On the Design Bar. Create the left glass extrusion 19 Using the same method. For Graphics ➤ Visibility.

However. The formulas in the following chapters of this tutorial should give you mainly an impression of how complex formulas can be set. if you can build your family without using formulas. Expressions for formulas Mathematical Function Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Logarithm Square Root Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine Arctangent e raised to an x power Absolute Value Expression + * / x^y. They can also be used to control Yes/No parameters. set the height to 2000) as well as mathematical expressions. as it will minimize performance hits. Formulas can use logic such as IF statements (IF the width is 1000.used to control families in many ways. you should do it.22 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading With Edges. where all of the parameters for a family are listed. Formulas are typed directly into the Family Types dialog box. Creating Formulas to Define Width Formulas are one of the many powerful aspects of Revit Architecture Families . x raised to the power of y log sqrt(Value) sin cos tan asin acos atan exp abs 570 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

enter 1000. 3'-0" ) Simple IF .(2*30) Simple IF IF ( <condition>. y = 2). 3 ) Simple IF . B = 3 ) . 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name.11 Samples for formulas Standard Width . select Dimensions. 3 Dimension the Frame Left and Center Post Left reference planes. <result-if-true>. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. select Add Parameter. 8 . 3 ) Yes/No Controlling the state of a Yes/No parameters A with a next Yes/No parameter B: Not (B) Position the center post 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Ref. click Dimension. 6 Select the dimension. Click OK.OR IF ( OR ( A = 1 . 5' . enter Width Sash Right. For Type of Parameter. This would overconstrain the family. for the temporary dimension. The width of the right sash will be determined using formulas. Level. Creating Formulas to Define Width | 571 . 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 8' ) ) ) IF . 8 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Family Types dialog.6. under Parameters. enter Width Sash Left.AND IF ( AND (x = 1 . click Family Types. 3' . on the Options Bar. IF ( Length < 45' . 2'-6". 2' 6" . for Label. 3 ) Multiple IF IF ( Length< 35' . select Length."A" is less than or equal to "B": IF ( NOT ( A > B ) . 4 Click Modify. For Group parameter under. IF ( Length < 55' . <result-if-false>) IF ( Length < 35' . NOTE Do not dimension the right sash using the same method. click Add. 8 . 8 . 5 Select the Center Post Left reference plane.

15 For Name. in the Formula row for Glass Length Right. Width Sash Left).Frame Height Top Frame Height Bottom . In the Formula row for Glass Height Right. enter if(Sash Right. ■ Click Apply. Height . 17 For Name.2 * Sash Width). ■ Click Apply. click Family Types. Width Sash Right). enter if(Sash Left.Frame Height Top . 16 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. In the Formula row for Glass Height Left. 19 In the Family Types dialog. and cannot be changed in the Family Types dialog.Frame Height Bottom).Frame Height Top . In the Formula row for Glass Length Left. The value for Width Sash Right is now calculated dependent on the values for Width. 572 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The glass dimensions are now dependent on the visibility settings for the window sashes.■ ■ For Group Parameter under. enter formulas: ■ Under Other. and Center Post Width. and press ENTER.Center Post Width 12 Press ENTER. Height . The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. Frame Width. enter 400. the new value is 880.2 * Sash Width). Define glass width and length 18 On the Design Bar. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400.Frame Height Top . enter if(Sash Right. select Dimensions.Width Sash Left) . the new value is 560.Frame Height Bottom .Frame Height Bottom). select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Test the family 13 Under Name. enter 1200. The value is greyed out.2 * Sash Width). and click OK. 11 In the Family Types dialog. for Dimensions ➤ Width Sash Right ➤ Formula.2 * Sash Width). select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Width Sash Left. enter if(Sash Left. enter the formula to get the calculated width: (Width . Click OK. You can test the formulas by switching between the different window types in the Family Types dialog. (Height . (Width Sash Right . and press ENTER. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously.(Frame Width * 2) . 14 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. (Height . (Width Sash Left . ■ ■ ■ 20 Click OK.

1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. expand Windows. 5 On the Tools toolbar. 8 In the Type Selector. 3 Click OK. They should be placed on a selected subcategory. 4 In the Project Browser. under Specify a new Work Plane. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. click (Plane). and lock all alignment constraints. for Name. 7 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. clear Chain. select Reference Plane : Insertion Edge. double-click Exterior. 9 On the Options Bar. click Symbolic Lines.Creating Elevation Lines The best method to create the elevation lines for the sashes is to create them in the exterior elevation view. under Category. 10 Create single symbolic lines as shown. note the Elevation Swing subcategory. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. select Elevation Swing [projection]. and click OK. under Elevations. Creating Elevation Lines | 573 .

7 Select Cool. select all symbolic lines. select Default. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. Assigning Default Materials You can assign a default material for each subcategory. this subcategory is added to the project and has the material assignment from the family. unless the default value is < By Category >. and click the button on the right side of the column. When you assign default materials in a family. click .11 In the drawing area. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. When the family is added to a project and the subcategory does not exist in the project. for Windows ➤ Frame/Mullion. Creating Material Parameters Material parameters for selected solid geometry make the family more flexible in terms of materials assignments for different window types. you create material parameters for the frame. and on the Options Bar. The default material is assigned to the Frame/Mullion category. and click OK. for Name. check whether the solid geometry has the correct subcategory assigned. clear Coarse.Matte. enter Window Frame. for Name. 16 Click OK twice. Assign a default material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click Duplicate. under Graphics. 13 While pressing CTRL. click Visibility. 6 In the Material Library dialog. and click OK three times. select the 2 symbolic lines on the left side. the object styles settings of the project define the default material. under Detail Levels. 5 In the Materials dialog. 18 Save the file. 12 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. under Category. select the rectangular button on the right side. and click . Next. 574 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 15 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click OK. while pressing CTRL. and select Whites. If the subcategory already exists in the project. sash. select Sash Right. 3 In the Materials dialog. associate the symbolic lines on the right side with the Sash Left family parameter. for Visible. and glass. expand accurender ➤ Solid Colors. 17 Using the same method. 4 In the New Material dialog. Material parameters override the material assignment of the subcategories in the Object Styles dialog. under AccuRender. click in the Material column.

click Family Types. If this parameter is defined as shared. which nests them. the solid geometry has the material that is assigned to its subcategory in the Object Styles dialog. and click Open. 4 In the Project Browser. a Width type parameter. You can override it on a type level. for Materials and Finishes ➤ Material. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to import window sill families into the window family and associate parameters of the nested families to the main family. Level. The Back and Center (Left/Right) reference planes define the origin of the family. and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. In this lesson. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. parameters of nested families can be associated with parameters of the main family. and a fixed dimension for the sill overhang. Note the new Material parameters under Material and Finishes. under Floor Plans. Concrete sill family 1 Close all open projects or families. 9 Click OK. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. Creating Nested Families Families can be imported into families. The default value is By Category. 10 Save the file. You can then model parts of the family separately from the main family model. click (3D). 6 Click OK three times. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Concrete Sill.rfa. click Add parameter. 4 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click Training Files. double-click Ref.1 On the Views toolbar. 2 Select the solid geometry of the window frame. 7 Using the same method. select Materials and Finishes. create 2 material parameters named Sash and Glass. Using family type parameters in the main family. click the rectangular button on the right side. For Group parameter under. . Creating Sill Families There are 2 window sill families available in the training folders. a Depth instance parameter. When the family is loaded into a project. Creating Nested Families | 575 . and associate the sash and glass solid geometry with the respective parameter. you can switch between imported families of the same category. enter Frame. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the families and explore the design of them. The concrete sill family consists of a solid extrusion.

5 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. and is visible only in detail level Fine. and click Open. 10 Click File menu ➤ Open. The Bottom reference plane defines the origin of the family. and click . Metal sill family 9 Close all open projects or families. 7 Select the solid geometry. click Training Files. The sketch lines of the extrusion are locked to all exterior reference planes. has a fixed material Window Sill Concrete assigned. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Metal Sill. under 3D views. 11 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Elevations. double-click Left. and click . The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. 8 Click OK. 12 Select the solid geometry. 6 In the Project Browser. The elevation view shows reference planes with fixed dimensions.rfa. 576 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

4 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and verify thatm_Concrete Sill.rfa is cleared. and then load families into the casement window family you have created.rfa is cleared. 3 Using the same method.rfa. Parameters. open m_Concrete Sill. click Load into Projects.rfa. The concrete sill family is now loaded into the Window family. has a fixed material Window Sill Metal assigned. The category of a family can be changed under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. and verify that m_Metal Sill. and is visible only in detail level Fine. 9 In the Load into Projects dialog. 10 Click OK. 2 In the Open dialog.rfa. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog.rfa -3D View: View1. 8 On the Design Bar. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family Families opened in the family editor can be loaded directly into other families. The metal sill family is now loaded into the Window family. navigate to Casement Window. Reference Planes.rfa. and Origins are as in the concrete sill family. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family | 577 . 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. Load the metal sill 7 Click Window menu ➤ Metal Sill. select Casement Window. click Load into Projects. Load the concrete sill 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Both sill families were created with the Generic Model family template and changed to a window family. and click Open. 13 Click OK. 6 Click OK. select Casement Window. You open the main family first.The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill.

enter Sill Length.2* Wall Offset. select Length. 5 Click OK. 578 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Maximize Casement Window. you create a parameter that determines the true sill length in the window family. enter Width . Creating a Length Parameter The sill length needs to be equivalent to the exterior width of the window family. in the Formula column.12 Close and save m_Metal Sill. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. For Group parameter under. Create the parameter 1 On the Design Bar. under Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. double-click Concrete Sill. for Construction ➤ Sill Length. select Construction.rfa. Associate the parameter to nested families 6 In the Project Browser. Click OK. they appear in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Windows. click Add. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rfa and m_Concrete Sill. 2 In the Family Types dialog. For Type of Parameter. click Family Types.rfa. As both sill families have been defined as Window families. under Parameters.

Level. click the rectangular button on the right side. under Floor Plans. and lock the alignment. Placing the Sill Family | 579 . for Dimensions ➤ Width. select Sill Length. The Width instance parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the Insertion Depth parameter of the window family. 4 Drag Concrete Sill into the drawing area.7 In the Type Properties dialog. expand Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. The Length type parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the calculated value of the Sill Length parameter of the window family. double-click Ref. and click to place it. for Dimensions ➤ Length. 5 Click Modify. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. associate the Length parameter of the Metal Sill family. 9 Click OK twice. 3 In the Project Browser. select the hidden Center (Left/Right) reference plan of the Sill family. 11 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane of the window family. 2 On the View Control Bar. The sill family needs to be positioned and aligned in plan and elevation views. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click the rectangular button on the right side. click (Align). Align the sill 10 On the Tools toolbar. 10 Using the same method. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. aligning it to reference planes in both plan and elevation views. Associate an instance parameter 6 Select the solid geometry of the concrete sill. you place the concrete sill in the project. 9 Click OK twice. Placing the Sill Family In this exercise. Place the family 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select Insertion Depth. and click .

click and spin the wall. click (Align). Creating a Shared Parameter In order to switch the sill from concrete to metal on an instance level. TIP If the sill does not display. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. align the bottom edge of the sill family. 16 Select the Sill reference plane of the window family. double-click Left. 18 On the View Control Bar.12 Using the same method. align the lower horizontal edge of the sill to the Insertion Edge reference plane of the Window family. 15 On the Tools toolbar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 17 In the Project Browser. The sill is placed in the desired position. and lock the alignment. 580 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 On the View Control Bar. double-click View 1. 13 In the Project Browser. you add a Sill Type parameter. under Elevations. under 3D Views. and lock the alignment.

Create the shared parameter 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. select Constraints. and select Instance. 3 Click Apply. select Windows. for Name. for Label. Testing Nested Families You can test the correct behavior of the nested families directly in the window family. 3 In the Save As dialog. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 18 On the Options Bar. Under Type of Parameter. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Testing Nested Families | 581 . Note that the last created Shared Parameter file has been automatically opened. enter Windows. the parameter appears on the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog in the available fields list. under Parameters. 13 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 9 In the Select Category dialog. click Shared parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 12 In the Family Types dialog. Add the parameter to a family 11 On the Design Bar. click Create. The metal sill replaces the concrete sill.To display the custom parameter in a schedule. click Family Types. 10 Click OK 3 times. select Metal Sill. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. navigate to Training. click OK. click New. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Group parameter under. under Parameters. select Sill Type. 14 In the Shared Parameters dialog. enter Training Shared Parameter. select <Family Type>. under Parameter Type. 16 Click OK twice. under Groups. enter Sill Type. and click OK. If the family is then loaded into a project. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type (default). click Add. you must define the parameter as a shared parameter. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Name. and click Select. Associate the parameter to geometry 17 In the drawing area. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Family Types. 4 Under File name. click New. select the Concrete Sill family. and click Save.

8 On the Views toolbar. 6 In the Type Selector.4 Click OK. check all views at all levels of detail. click and spin the wall. 2 Click Window menu ➤ Casement Window. Test windows and sills 1 On the Standard toolbar. 582 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click (3D). TIP If the sill does not display. Testing the Family in a Project Environment Finally. click Load into Projects. insert a Casement Window : 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 in the wall. 9 In the View Control Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. select Casement Window : 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200 and place the window in the wall. click .rfa -3D View: View 1. use best practice to test the window in multiple wall thicknesses in the project environment. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 Using the same method. This creates a new project with the default template. 3 On the Design Bar. click the Wall tool. click the Window tool. and create a horizontal wall.

Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. Width. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. select Metal Sill. You begin by creating the desktop. add the fields Mark. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type. Create a window schedule 12 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Sill Type is now displayed in the schedule table. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Window Schedule with Sills. rolltop. and Sill Type to the Scheduled fields list. Under Name. Creating a Furniture Family | 583 .10 Select the smaller window. Click OK. and click . Height. Note that the window sill has changed. drawer base. and drawers as extrusions. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. select Windows. 13 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and click OK. and click OK.

click Ref Plane. Level. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. 4 Maximize the view. 584 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. 2 On the File menu. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.rft. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click New ➤ Family. they represent the furniture centerline axes. their exact location is not critical. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. Floor Plan: Ref. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template.Finally. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. 5 On the View menu. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. click Training Files.

click Dimension. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. and ending at the right reference plane. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 585 . proceeding to the centerline reference plane. as shown. 10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown.8 Draw two vertical reference planes.

Click the EQ symbol to make the segments equal. 13 Select the left reference plane. click Modify. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. 12 On the Design Bar. 586 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm.

Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. and ending at the lower reference plane. as shown. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 587 . 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. as shown. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. proceeding to the centerline reference plane.15 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane.

TIP To do this. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. horizontal reference plane. 19 Select the upper. click Modify. 588 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .18 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. Afterwards. click Modify. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown.

Select Type. specify the following: ■ Under Parameter type..Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. select Family parameter. 27 On the Options Bar. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 589 .. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog... select <Add parameter. 24 On the Options Bar. select Dimensions. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. enter Length for Name. Under Parameter Data. select <Add parameter. For Group parameter under. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension.> for Label. select Family parameter.> for Label. Click OK.

When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. 590 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Select Type. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. Click Apply. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. 31 In the Family Types dialog. For Group parameter under. Therefore. Click OK. enter 3000 mm for Length. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. select Dimensions. you can still see the model. 30 On the Design Bar.■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. click Family Types. so when you open the Family Types dialog. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. it will also adapt to the same changes. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. enter Depth for Name.

click . under Specify a new Work Plane. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. click Symbolic Lines. select Level: Ref. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. enter 2000 mm for Length. click . 5 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 591 . “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 591. 8 On the Options Bar. Your lines may have a lighter weight. and click to select all four symbolic lines. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. 4 On the Design Bar. Click OK. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. NOTE In the image below.32 In the Family Types dialog. and enter 100 mm for Depth. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. 2 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane. Level for Name. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Lines.

Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. click Finish Sketch. click Dimension. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop.10 On the Design Bar. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. click Modify. and select the bottom edge. and select the top edge. 592 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. under Elevations.

select Dimensions. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 593 .> for Label. 22 On the Options Bar. enter Thickness for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.. as shown. enter Height for Name. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. select Family parameter. select Dimensions. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 25 On the Options Bar. Select Type.. Under Parameter Data. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop.> for Label.. select Family parameter. Click OK.. select <Add parameter. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog. Click OK. For Group parameter under. select <Add parameter. Select Type. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. For Group parameter under. click Modify. 27 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Under Parameter Data.

click . “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 594. Level. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. 30 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. so when you open the Family Types dialog. double-click Ref. 2 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. and click Apply. click Family Types. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. and click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length. 31 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. 594 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Click OK. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 3 On the Options Bar. Enter 1200 mm for Height. and enter 100 mm for Offset. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane.Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. you can still see the model. 29 On the Design Bar. enter 2000 mm for Length. and click Apply.

6 On the Design Bar. Lock the dimension as shown. click Dimension. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 595 .5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. Click the lock icon as shown. 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it.

as shown. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. 10 On the Design Bar. select Level: Ref. click . 12 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Set Work Plane. two lock icons display. After you complete the rectangle.Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Level for Name. click Lines. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. under Specify a new Work Plane. 596 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 On the Options Bar.

click the Mirror tool. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 597 . using the TAB key. You can also highlight the entire line chain. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 19 Select the four sketched lines. click Modify. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis.16 On the Design Bar. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. 20 On the Tools toolbar. Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. . click Dimension.

24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. 23 For the align-to reference. 598 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. click . select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. as shown below at the cursor. 22 On the Tools toolbar.

and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. 26 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.A lock icon displays. ■ Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 599 . and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base.

. 600 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Parameter Data. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. 30 On the Options Bar. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. as shown. Select Type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.> for Label. Click OK. select Dimensions. For Group parameter under..28 Add two final dimensions. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. select Family parameter. select <Add parameter.

38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. 35 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. double-click Front. under Elevations.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 601 . Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. 34 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Tools toolbar. 33 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click . select Drawer Base Width for Label.

After the alignment. click . 41 On the View toolbar. 602 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. click the Scale control and select 1:20. 40 On the Design Bar. click it to lock the alignment. 45 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. you can still see the model. click Visibility/Graphics. notice that annotations display in this view. 42 On the View menu.39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. However. a lock icon displays.

47 On the Design Bar. double-click Right. Enter 1200 mm for Height. 49 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. Click Apply. click Family Types. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 603. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 48 In the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. under Elevations. Click OK. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. enter 2000 mm for Length. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 603 . 50 Proceed to the next exercise.

and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. then the lower horizontal sketch line. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. click Lines. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. 3 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Set Work Plane. click . as shown. and click to specify the upper left corner. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 604 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 Select the desk top. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click .2 On the Design Bar.

click Dimension. and lock it. 11 On the Design Bar. and lock the alignment. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. and lock it. then select the right parallel sketch line. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 605 .10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion.

16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Lines.13 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. the upper sketch line. 14 On the Options Bar. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. 606 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click the Fillet arc tool. . Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line.

select the right edge of the rolltop.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 607 . click . Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. and click the lock icon. and click the lock icon. select the left edge of the rolltop. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. under Elevations. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. 18 On the Tools toolbar.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog.21 On the View toolbar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. If not. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. and click Apply. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. 24 In the Family Types dialog. 608 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Apply. click Family Types. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. Enter 1500 mm for Height. You can also use dimension constraints. enter 4000 mm for Length. and click Apply. 23 On the Design Bar. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. you can still see the model. click .

“Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 609. enter 2000 mm for Length. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. select Pick a Plane. click Set Work Plane. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Enter 750 mm for Height. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. Enter 100 mm for Thickness.25 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. Click Apply. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. 2 On the Design Bar. Click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 609 .

under Elevations. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. click . 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. 6 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Tools toolbar. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. click drawer set on the left. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. select Multiple Alignment. There should be four dimensions as shown. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 610 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. zoom the view until you do. 12 On the Options Bar. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 14 On the Tools toolbar. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. click Lines.5 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. . click . Lock each dimension as you add it. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first.

click . click Extrusion Properties. click for Texture. under AccuRender. 31 On the View Control Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Desk . click 24 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. 28 Click OK. click Finish Sketch. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. 29 In the Materials dialog.15 On the Tools toolbar. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. Cherry. and click OK.Wood. 27 In the Material Library dialog. Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 20 On the View toolbar. click OK. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. click . 16 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. for Material. under Constraints. 26 In the Materials dialog. click Duplicate. click the Model Graphics Style control. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. click . Dark. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 611 . click Modify. click OK. 25 In the New Material dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. and select Shading with Edges. Polished. 22 On the Options Bar.

and click Apply. The desk should adapt to all the changes. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. 33 On the Design Bar. 35 In the Family Types dialog. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 750 mm for Height. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. you can still see the model. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 612 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click Apply. and click Apply. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. enter 2000 mm for Length. click Family Types. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 612. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. If not. 34 In the Family Types dialog.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. You can also use dimension constraints. Click OK. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

15 On the View Control Bar. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. click New. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. 17 On the Options Bar. Defining New Furniture Types | 613 . click Family Types. 6 In the Name dialog. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. 9 In the Name dialog. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 3 In the Name dialog. 11 On the File menu. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. 19 In the Type Selector. under Family Types. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. and click Apply. click . select it.rfa. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. Training Furniture. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. 10 In the Family Types dialog. 5 Under Family Types. click New. to start a new project based on your default template. 8 Under Family Types. click Save. click 14 On the View toolbar. click Apply. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. 7 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Load.rfa file. 18 In the Open dialog. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. 2 In the Family Types dialog. click Component. 4 In the Family Types dialog. click New. and click OK. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. and click Apply. and click OK. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. and click OK.

21 In the Type Selector. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. and click to add the third desk. 614 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. and add the second desk. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. 23 In the Type Selector.

Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. click Set Work Plane. In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Baluster. Drawing a Baluster | 615 . click Finish Sketch. and click OK.rft. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. Level. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. click Training Files. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. expand Views (all). 6 In the Work Plane dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View menu. 5 On the Design Bar.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and double-click Ref. Level for Name. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. However. 4 On the Design Bar. select Ref. click New ➤ Family. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. click Lines. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. their exact location is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar.

The new custom baluster is now complete. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 11 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. click . 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. By default.rfa.rte. click the Modelling tab. 6 On the Design Bar.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. click Modify and select the extrusion. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 7 On the File menu. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the lock icon. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click Stairs. click New ➤ Project. 616 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. 12 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. double-click Front. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. 2 In the left pane of the New Project dialog. click Finish Sketch. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown.

click . click Modify and select the existing railing. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 In the Type Properties dialog. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 617 . 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar.rfa file. click OK. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog. 11 On the View menu.8 In the Open dialog. and click Open. click Orient ➤ Southwest. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. click OK. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. under Baluster Family. click Shading with Edges. click Edit/New. select it. 9 On the View toolbar. click . 10 On the View menu. 19 Click OK. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster.

cornices. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. and a host sweep. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. click New ➤ Family. click New ➤ Family. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs.rft. However. click Training Files. and other sweep-defined objects.rfa. In the left pane of the New dialog.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. click Training Files.Sweep. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. you create a rail profile. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. click Lines. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Rail. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall. their exact location is not critical. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. a reveal. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. a railing. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . 618 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. Level is open. verify that Ref. a stair nosing. In the left pane of the New dialog. you create five different profiles: a sweep. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. In this lesson. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. The new sweep profile is now complete.rft. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. balusters. soffits. you draw a sweep profile.

rfa. However. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane.rft. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 619 .Rail. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. click New ➤ Family. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. you create a stair nosing profile. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise.The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. their exact location is not critical. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. The new rail profile is now complete. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. In the left pane of the New dialog. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. click Training Files.

click Training Files. 620 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. In the left pane of the New dialog. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . you create a reveal profile. However. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection.rfa.rft. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Ref. In addition. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. Level is open. click Lines.Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. click New ➤ Family. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. their exact location is not critical. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Reveal. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown. The new stair nosing profile is now complete. under Floor Plans.Stair Nosing.

you create a host sweep profile. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. their exact location is not critical. click Lines. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection.Reveal. click Training Files. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 621 . under Floor Plans. which may be any vertical surface. Level is open. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. The new reveal profile is now complete. click New ➤ Family. However.rfa. In the left pane of the New dialog. verify that Ref. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .rft.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Hosted.

The new host sweep profile is now complete. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path. click New ➤ Project. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. However.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. their exact location is not critical. 2 In the New Project dialog.rte.rfa. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. click Lines. Specify the family category 5 On the Modelling menu. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. click OK. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. click Create. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. click Training Files.Host Sweep. 622 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane.

and double-click South. the exact location of the path is not critical.rfa.Sweep. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path. Modify the sweep profile configuration 18 In the Project Browser. enter Sweep for Name. click Load Profiles.Sweep. click Sketch 2D Path. select Profile . and click Open. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 623 . and click OK. navigate to the location of Profile . 7 In the Name dialog.6 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 17 On the View toolbar. 13 In the Open dialog. Sketch the 2D sweep path 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Finish Family. 14 In the Type Selector. 16 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. beside Load Profiles. click Finish Path. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 12 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 15 On the Design Bar. click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. select it. click Ref Plane. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. click . expand Elevations. 19 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. select Generic Models for Family Category. click Finish Sweep.

click . click Edit. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . 4 In the New Project dialog. 27 On the View toolbar. click Browse. Under Constraints. 22 Select the sweep profile and. click Wall. and open Metric Templates\DefaultMetric.21 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. 25 Click OK. on the Options Bar. Draw a wall group 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. 23 Select the sweep profile again and. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. click Training Files. click Finish Family. 2 In the New Project dialog. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. The sweep profile application is now complete. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. 26 On the Design Bar. click OK. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. select Profile Is Flipped.rte. 624 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Other. click 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click New ➤ Project. on the Options Bar.

9 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 625 . 7 On the View toolbar. verify that Horizontal is selected. 10 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. 6 Draw four walls as shown. their exact location is not critical. 11 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. click .NOTE When you draw the walls. click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep.

click Edit/New. you specify the room tag parameters. 15 Select the wall sweep and. and click OK. 14 In the Open dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.rfa. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. click 16 In the Element Properties dialog. select Profile . and open Metric\Templates\M_Room Tag. . and click Open.rft. In the left pane of the New dialog. click . on the Options Bar. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. navigate to the location of Profile . 21 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. under Construction. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. 20 In the Dynamic View dialog.Host Sweep for Profile.Host Sweep : Profile . click Spin [Shift]. you create a room tag which displays room name. and area with labels added to extract project data. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template. floor and ceiling finish. click OK.Host Sweep. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 13 On the File menu. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 On the View toolbar. Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. click Modify. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. select it. 626 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. click Training Files.12 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. select Area. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 627 . 3 On the Options Bar. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. click Label. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. and click OK. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. 17 In the Type Selector. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. clear Underline. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. and click OK. click Label. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. select Name. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Underline. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. click OK. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. click . click Edit/New.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 12 In the Type Selector. select Label : 2mm. select Ceiling Finish. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog. enter 2mm for Name. select Floor Finish. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 7 In the Type properties dialog. and click OK.

click .rfa. In the left pane of the New dialog. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. and open Metric\Templates\Generic Annotation. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF.rft. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. click Lines. The new room tag is now ready for use. click Training Files. 628 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. notice that there is only one view available. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.

Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 629 . 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. click . click Modify. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. 10 On the Design Bar. 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 6 On the Options Bar.5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm.

click Modify. click OK. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select A1 metric. click New. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog. select 3 for Line Weight. click Modify. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Training North Arrow. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Training Files. and click OK.rte. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 16 In the Type Selector. 8 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 9 On the File menu. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. 4 In the New Project dialog. 630 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Sheet. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. under Modify Subcategories. select North Line. and click OK. 12 In the Object Styles dialog. click New ➤ Project. 17 On the Design Bar. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. click Object Styles. and select the upper vertical line. enter North Line for Name. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. 2 In the New Project dialog. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. 7 Click OK.rfa.The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. in the North Line row. click Browse. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name.

rfa. Creating a Titleblock Family | 631 . and labels. click Symbol. text. 12 In the Type Selector.10 In the Open dialog.rft. graphics. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. The titleblock has linework. and your project data. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. select it. 13 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. and click Open. 14 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click New ➤ Titleblock. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. click Modify. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. and open Metric\Templates\A0 Metric. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. click Training Files. In the left pane of the New dialog. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. select Training North Arrow.

Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. 632 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. and enter 140 for Offset. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. . click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. and click . 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. click Lines. click . click . 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. and click to draw a new vertical line. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. and enter -25 for Offset.

and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 17 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. and select the second and third horizontal lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. select Wide Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line.12 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 16 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 15 On the Design Bar. and enter 20 for Offset. select Title Blocks. press CTRL. 25 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. click Modify. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. click . 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. enter 30 for Offset. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 633 . 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line.

click Training Files. text notes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add a company logo. click . and labels to your titleblock. click Duplicate. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. click Import/Link ➤ Image. 634 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise.jpg. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text. and open Common\Company Logo. click Edit/New. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. 4 Zoom in on the logo. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Options Bar.The titleblock linework is now complete.

13 Enter Arch Design Inc. and select the last text note. enter 10 for Text Size. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. select Text : 8mm. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. click Modify. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Select the drag handle. in the text box. and add an address and phone number as shown. and drag the text note down as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. under Text. 11 Click OK twice.9 In the Name dialog. and click OK. enter 10mm Bold for Name. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. and select Bold. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 635 . 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text.

select Constrain and Multiple. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. click . and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. click Text. address. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 636 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. click Modify. and select the consultant text note. 24 On the Options Bar. Add consultant name.

27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 637 .

30 In the Element Properties dialog. select Text : 5mm. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. enter 5 for Text Size. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 638 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 5mm for Name. and enter Drawn By:. click Duplicate. 34 Click OK twice. 29 On the Options Bar. and enter Date:. under Text.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Name dialog. and enter Sheet Number:. click . and enter Checked By:. click Text. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. click Edit/New. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up.

and click to specify the label location. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 639 . and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click OK. 41 On the Options Bar. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. select Project Issue Date. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. click Label.

click . and click to specify the label location. select Checked By and click OK. select Label : 15mm Label. and click to specify the label location. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. 640 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Project Number. click Duplicate. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 50 On the Options Bar. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Label. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. enter 15 for Text Size. 59 On the Options Bar. under Text. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. click Edit/New. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click to specify the label location. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. 55 Click OK twice. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. select Sheet Number. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. select Drawn By. and click OK. click Center and Middle. enter 15mm Label for Name. and click OK. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. 53 In the Name dialog. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. and click OK.

68 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click to specify the label location. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. and click OK. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 641 . and click OK. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Client Name. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click to specify the label location. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Project Name.

Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. select 4mm Label. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. and click to specify the label location.rfa file. 642 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Modify. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. click Left and Middle. 71 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. and click Open. click OK. and click OK. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Edit/New.rte. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 77 On the Options Bar. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog. 80 On the Design Bar. 75 Click OK twice. 4 In the New Project dialog. 7 In the Open dialog. under Text. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. click Duplicate.70 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. and click OK. enter 4 for Text Size. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Click OK.rfa. click . The titleblock graphics. text. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. select it. enter 4mm Label. select File Path. 73 In the Name dialog. click New ➤ Project. and labels are now complete. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. click Load. click Sheet. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Browse.

15 In the Type Properties dialog. click Project Information. 14 On the Settings menu. 13 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 2005 for Project Issue Date. under Other. and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 643 . 16 Click OK. click Modify and select the titleblock. Enter Office Building for Project Name. 11 On the Options Bar. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. Enter In Progress for Project Status. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1.Modify titleblock properties 10 On the Design Bar. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. enter Name for Drawn By. click .

you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. 644 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. To change the units of measurement to meters. click Training Files. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. on the Settings menu. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. click Orient ➤ Southeast. Set the Length units to millimeters. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Pantheon. set the Area to Square meters. and set the suffix to None. In the left pane of the Open dialog. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. click Project Units.rvt. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category.

5 In the Name dialog. 7 On the Design Bar.Center. select Roofs for Family Category. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. select Section: Wall Section . and click OK. expand Views (all). Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. enter Dome for Name. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 645 . and click Open View. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and click OK. click Set Work Plane. select Pick a Plane. and double-click South. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. 8 In the Work Plane dialog.Next. click Create. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 10 In the Go To View dialog. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. expand Elevations.

16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. 646 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar.The center wall section view is displayed. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click Axis. 15 On the Options Bar. click . 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. click . click Lines.

Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle.17 Move the cursor out. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. 19 On the Options Bar. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 647 . click . and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. and select Chain.

23 On the Options Bar. select Delete Inner Segment. click Lines. click .Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 648 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. click . Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. 27 On the Options Bar. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point.

click and select Chain. click . 32 On the Options Bar. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 649 . Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. click Lines.

select Concrete . click for Material. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. under Materials and Finishes. click Create. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 40 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. click Revolution Properties. click Finish Sketch. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 On the View toolbar. and click OK. select Floors for Family Category. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. click Finish Family. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. click OK.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. 650 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 38 In the Materials dialog.The dome roof closed profile is now complete. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. click . 41 On the Design Bar.

12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 9 In the Go To View dialog.3 In the Name dialog. enter Concave Floor for Name. and click OK. 7 In the Work Plane dialog. click Axis. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click . Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. and click Open View. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 651 .Center. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. double-click South. select Section: Wall Section . 5 On the Design Bar. select Pick a Plane. and click OK. 11 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 6 On the Design Bar.

15 Specify the intersection of the T. click . NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.O. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. Footing level line and the axis. 652 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. and select Chain. 14 On the Options Bar.

double-click 3D Section View. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile.Exploring Family Templates | 653 . The concave floor closed profile is now complete. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Materials dialog. you start with the selection of a family template.18 Specify the intersection of the T. Appendix A . Revit Architecture differs between templates for model families. click Finish Family.Exploring Family Templates Revit Architecture ships with a large number of family templates. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. such as reference planes and sub-categories. select Cobblestone for Name. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. click for Material. click Revolution Properties. click OK. the new family has specific default contents. and click OK. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. and title blocks. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.O.O. Based on the template you select. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Appendix A . 24 On the Design Bar. When you create a new family. annotation families. 25 On the Design Bar.

Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Casework Casework Family template for casework. Category: None Baluster . Category: None Casework wall based Family template for casework.Model Family Templates The templates for model families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views.rft Baluster Description Family template for baluster families.Post Family template for posts of balusters. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. 654 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The following table gives an overview of the templates for model families: Template Name *.

If a column intersects a wall. is used to create 2D detail components. Category: Detail Items Model Family Templates | 655 . Includes the filled region tool. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. Category: Curtain Panels Detail Component line based 2D family. contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Category: Detail Items Detail Component 2D family. Category: Columns Curtain Wall Panel Family template for filling elements of curtain walls. the column inherits the material of the wall. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value.rft Description Column Family template to create columns. includes the filled region tool.Template Name *.

656 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Ceiling based families can only be placed on any ceiling in a project. Category: Curtain Panels Door Family template for doors. Contains a sample ceiling geometry. Category: Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixture ceiling based Family template to create electrical equipment families.Curtain Wall Description Family template for door elements of curtain walls.Template Name *.rft Door . Category: Doors Electrical Equipment Family template to create electrical equipment families.

rft Description Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture wall based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Entourage Furniture System Family template to create furniture system families. Category: Furniture Systems Furniture Family template to create furniture families. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Electrical Fixtures Entourage Family template to create entourage families.Template Name *. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Furniture Model Family Templates | 657 .

Contains a sample ceiling geometry. Category: Generic Models Generic Model face based Family template to create any generic model geometry.Template Name *. Category: Generic Models Generic Model floor based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains sample floor geometry.rft Generic Model ceiling based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Face based families can only be placed on any face in a project. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling in a project. Category: Generic Models 658 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Includes the filled region tool. Category: Generic Models Sample: Wall Opening with 2D graphics in plan view and a void extrusion. Contains sample wall geometry. Contains sample roof geometry. Roof based families can only be placed on any roof face in a project. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Category: Generic Models Generic Model wall based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Model Family Templates | 659 .rft Generic Model line based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Models Generic Model roof based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains a reference line and left and right reference planes.Template Name *.

Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture roof based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Contains sample floor geometry. Category: Generic Model Lighting Fixture floor based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Roof based families can only be placed on a roof face in a project. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project.rft Generic Model Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Contains sample roof geometry. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.Template Name *. Category: Lighting Fixtures 660 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Contains sample ceiling geometry. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures Linear Lighting Fixture floor based. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture Family template to create lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture wall based Family template to create lighting fixtures.rft Lighting Fixture ceiling based Description Family template to create lighting fixtures.Template Name *. Category: Lighting Fixtures Model Family Templates | 661 . Ceiling based families can only be placed on a ceiling face in a project. Linear Lighting Fixture wall based. Linear Lighting Fixture Family templates to create linear lighting fixtures. Wall based families can only be placed on a wall face in a project. Linear Lighting Fixture roof based. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures.

Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling faces in a project. Masses can report gross volume. and roofs Massing families can also be generating floor area faces. Category: Mechanical Equipment 662 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft Mass Description Family template to create massing families. Category: Mechanical Equipment Mechanical Equipment wall based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Contains sample ceiling geometry. and gross floor areas. Category: Mass Sample: Mass families from the content library.Template Name *. Contains sample wall geometry. Mechanical Equipment ceiling based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. gross surface area. slabs. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Faces of masses can be used to create other model elements like walls.

Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Parking Planting Family template to create planting families.Template Name *. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Planting Plumbing Fixture wall based Family template to create plumbing fixture families.rft Mechanical Equipment Description Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Category: Mechanical Equipment Parking Family template to create parking families. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Fixture Family template to create plumbing fixture families. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Model Family Templates | 663 .

wall sweep) can be explicitly assigned under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Category: Profiles. Families based on this template can be used in a project with the tools in the Modelling menu ➤ Host Sweeps. mullion.rft Profile Description Family template to create 2D profiles. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Profile-Reveal Family template to create 2D profiles for wall sweeps and wall reveals. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Profile-Hosted Family template to create 2D profiles for hosts. slab edge. Category: Profiles. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Category: Profiles.Template Name *. 664 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Profile usage (fascia. Contains default reference planes Rail Centerline and Rail Top. gutter. Category: Profiles. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. Profile-Rail Family template to create 2D profiles for rails.

Category: Specialty Equipment Speciality Equipment Family template to create specialty equipment families. The family has an rpc file link included. Category: Profiles. Category: Entourage Site Family template to create Site families.rft Profile-Stair Nosing Description Family template to create 2D profiles for stair nosing. Contains sample wall geometry. A profile is used only in combination with system families.Template Name *. RPC Family Family template for models using the Real People Collection product family. Category: Site Speciality Equipment wall based Family template to create specialty equipment families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Specialty Equipment Model Family Templates | 665 .

specific setting for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. A structural column can be defined as a room-bounding element if the structural material type is set to concrete or precast concrete. The family templates contain specific reference planes for members and stick symbols. If a structural column intersects a wall. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. specific settings for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. The family has illumination and spot properties for the rendering tools.Template Name *. Category: Lighting Fixtures Family template to create structural columns. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. Spot Lighting Fixture ceiling based.rft Spot Lighting Fixture floor based. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Spot Lighting Fixture roof based. such as beams and braces. Spot Lighting Fixture Structural Column Description Family templates to create spot lighting fixtures. Category: Structural Foundations Structural Framing . Spot Lighting Fixture wall based. Category: Structural Columns Structural Foundation Family templates to create structural foundation families. Beams can be placed on structural columns. the column cuts out the wall. If a structural foundation family is placed below a column.Beams and Braces Family template to create structural framing families. it moves its position if the base of the structural column is moved. 666 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Category: Windows Model Family Templates | 667 . Category: Structural Framing Window .Complex and Trusses Family template to create structural framing families.Template Name *.rft Description Category: Structural Framing Structural Framing .Curtain Wall Family template for window elements of curtain walls. Category: Curtain Panels Window with trim Family template for windows including trim on the exterior side. such as trusses.

text. click Tag ➤ Multi-Category to add a tag. Category: Multi-Category Tags Family template for room tags.rft Callout Head Door Tag Generic Annotation Description Family template for the tag of a callout. Category: Spot Elevation Symbols Generic Tag Grid Head Level Head Multi-Category Tag Room Tag Section Head Spot Elevation Symbol 668 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Level Heads Family template for Multi-Category tags. Category: Generic Annotation Family template for tags.0mm has a size of 2. and parameter text size are always related to the current scale of the View Control Bar. parameter text created with a text height of 2. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.rft Window Description Family template for windows.Template Name *. In the family the intersection of the horizontal and right reference planes define connection location with the system section line. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. and parameters. Category: Section Marks Family template to define the symbol for spot elevations. Category: Windows Annotation Family Templates The templates for annotation families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Annotation. Category: Room Tags Family template for section heads. The intersection of 2 reference planes defines the insertion point of a tag.0mm on a plotted sheet. Category: Door Tags Family template for generic annotations. The following table gives an overview of the templates for annotation families: Template Name *. Thus. text size. Annotation families are scale-dependent. Symbol size. the same shared parameter is added to a project as a project parameter and can be used to filter selected elements to be tagged with the MultiCategory tag. Category: Callouts Family template for door tags. Annotation families consist mainly of lines. On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A MultiCategory tag needs a shared parameter as filter parameter. Category: Grid Heads Family template for level heads. Category: Generic Model Tags Family template for the grid heads. filled regions.

rft View Title Window Tag Description Family template to define view title of a view in a sheet.rft ■ B .rft ■ A4 metric. Category: Window Tags Titleblock Family Templates The templates for titleblock families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Titleblocks. Category: View Titles Family template for window tags.rft ■ D . filled regions.rft ■ A2 metric.36 x 24. You import images to your title block. and parameters.rft ■ C .rft Metric ■ A0 metric.42 x 30.rft ■ A3 metric. In the Select a Titleblock dialog. the title block can be assigned to a sheet using View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. all loaded title block families are listed for selection.rft Titleblock Family Templates | 669 .11 x 8. The following table gives an overview of the templates for title block families: Template Name Comments Family templates for title blocks using common standard sizes.rft ■ E1 . text.Template Name *. Imperial ■ A .rft ■ A1 metric.rft ■ New Site Metric.17 x 11.24 x 18. Title block families consist mainly of lines for the plan border. In a project.5.

670 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. you will understand the process. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. During this tutorial. assigned subcatecories. not specifically how to make a floor truss.Parametric Component Design Techniques 17 In this tutorial. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit Architecture 2008. At the end of this tutorial. 671 . The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. formula-based parameters. The truss also has multiple types. and detail level controls. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. methodology. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. In this case. In exercises that become increasingly complex.

Two types should be created. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 672 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . In this lesson. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. a generic floor-based component might work. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. this must be a structural beam component. For training purposes. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. In the next exercise. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. In this case. you determine the requirements of the new component. and also works intuitively with them. it is not the best solution. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. It should also be an available option within a beam system. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. In addition. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. and structural walls. NOTE When creating a new family.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. Take this into consideration during your design planning. For every complexity added to a family. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. beams. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. you should avoid over-designing the component. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. Although this solution is possible. In this case. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically.

You have completed the planning stage for the new family. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. Depending on the family you are designing. the planning stage and questions may differ. would require Instance or Type parameters. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 673. In addition. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. Selecting the Family Template | 673 . Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. In the previous exercise. 4 Continue with the next exercise. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. such as wood type. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. These materials can be applied using Object Styles.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials.

5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. In addition. for example: wall based or floor based. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. 4 Scroll through the various template options. On the right side of the New dialog. Select it so that the preview displays. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). However. click Training Files. Like most generic family templates. and open Metric\Templates.Beams and Braces. 6 In the New dialog. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. scroll to the structural framing templates. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. The New dialog opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog.rft 674 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .rft. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. There are two structural framing templates provided. notice the preview. this is where you access family templates.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. you will access them from the Training Files folder. Usually. ■ Metric Structural Framing .

Level Selecting the Family Template | 675 .Beams and Braces. 10 Maximize the view. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . Floor Plan: Ref. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing .Complex and Trusses. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion.rft to open it. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back).rft and notice the preview.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . and display functions required by structural beams. Level. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. This template is the best starting point for the new family. Floor Plan: Ref. Because of its simplicity.Beams and Braces. ■ Metric Structural Framing .Complex and Trusses. spacing. and notice the preview. Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane.This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping.rft.

12 In the Project Browser. however. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. Therefore. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. Like many templates. under Elevations. Level. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. lines. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. you add reference planes to the beam design. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 676.In this view. double-click Front. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. double-click View 1. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. Reference Plane: Left. you add the reference planes. double-click Ref. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. 11 In the Project Browser. 676 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under 3D Views.

two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 677 . The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. In the project plan view image below. In the image below. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. notice the location of the beam extents. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project.

Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. click . Before adding new reference planes. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. click Ref Plane. 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back).These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). In a later exercise. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. 678 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes.

double-click Front. Level as the mirror axis. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. 10 On the Design Bar. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. Level. click on the Edit toolbar. To do this. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. and select the Level: Ref. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. click to place it. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. 14 On the Options Bar. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. under Elevations. click . 13 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task.Add ref. Adding Reference Planes | 679 . These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. Level. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane.

16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. Before you move on to the next exercise. 680 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. click to place it as shown. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. specify an Offset of 200 mm. click to place it as shown. 19 On the Options Bar.

cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. specify an Offset of 238 mm. click to place it as shown. Adding Reference Planes | 681 . under Floor Plans. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. which you do in the next exercise. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. double-click Ref. click to place it as shown. Level. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 22 On the Options Bar.

Repeat this step for the remaining extents so that your plan view resembles the image below. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. 28 In the Save As dialog. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name.25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 26 Starting with one of the reference planes you added to define the center chase. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. you add dimensions and constraints to the to the skeleton. Make sure you remember where you saved it. select the reference plane and adjust the extents similar to the image below. 682 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . navigate to the folder of your choice. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. You have finished creating the initial skeleton of the open web wood floor truss. In the following exercise. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 682. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. and click Save.

and click the EQ symbol when it displays. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. Wood Floor Truss.Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 2 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. After adding the dimension. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. click Modify. click Dimension. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown.rfa. 6 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 683 . Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. click .

9 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. Level. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. the Center reference plane. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. place the dimension to the left as shown. Place the dimension as shown. under Elevations. 684 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint.7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. and the lower horizontal reference plane. click Dimension. double-click Front. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane.

place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint.Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. add two dimensions as shown. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 685 . Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. 15 Add four dimensions as shown. and place it below the dimension you added previously. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase.

“Creating New Length Parameters” on page 686. and constraints as needed. In this exercise. In the next exercise. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. dimensions. If the component has material that varies per component.You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. When you design a new family. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. 686 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Throughout the tutorial. double-click Ref. Wood Floor Truss. consider making it a type parameter.rfa. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. In addition. you will add additional reference planes. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. under Floor Plans. it becomes a parameter. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. consider making it an instance parameter. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. Level. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. consider making it a type parameter.

Select Type. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. enter Depth for Name. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. select Add parameter for Label. select Add parameter for Label. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Elevations. Click OK. Under Parameter Data. Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data. Creating New Length Parameters | 687 .3 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. ■ Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. double-click Front. Select Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. enter Chord Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

Create center chase width parameter
9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

10 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data, enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

Create chord thickness parameter
12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown.

13 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.

688 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter Chord Thickness for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.

Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions
15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.

Creating New Length Parameters | 689

18 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. In the Family Types dialog, notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group, Dimensions. When you load this family into a project, these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog for the beam. 19 Click Cancel. 20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 690.

Flexing the Component Model
One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Flexing the model means to change parameter values, thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. This is not limited to length parameters. If you add a new material parameter, you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. You should flex the model after any major change to the design.

You should flex a new family after:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Adding or modifying an element. Adding or modifying a parameter. Adding a new constraint. Nesting a component. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.

When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog, rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.

690 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Preparing the family for flexing
1 When flexing the model, you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog:

Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner. or

Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.

Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog so that you can view the model.

Flex the truss depth
3 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing.

Flexing the Component Model | 691

4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog, reset the parameters back to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 300 mm for Depth. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. Click OK.

When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. 6 On the File menu, click Save. 7 Proceed to the next lesson, “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 693.

692 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Adding Solid Geometry
In this lesson, you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After creating the extrusions, you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After flexing the design, you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

Creating Solid Extrusions
In this exercise, you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After adding the chords, you align and lock their position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add chord extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design.

3 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog, click Name, select Reference Plane: Member Left, and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and select Lock.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.

Adding Solid Geometry | 693

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.

694 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry.

17 On the File menu, click Save. 18 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 695.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Constrain the extrusion ends
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Enter SD; this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 3 Select the chord extrusions.

4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 695

5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Flex the design
6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog is open. On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. 8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Add a new dimension and constraint
9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

696 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment.

Flex the length
12 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 13 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working.

TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards, flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 14 Click OK.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 697

In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.

Flex the chord width, depth, and thickness
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. 16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges.

17 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 18 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 600mm for Depth. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore, try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.

Click Apply.

The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 19 Specify the beam values shown below:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply, and click OK.

20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Additional Solid Geometry” on page 698.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase.

Dataset

698 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add the center chase extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 3 On the View Control Bar, click the Hide/Isolate control, and click Hide Element. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 699

NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 17 Zoom in on the center chase.

Align and lock the new extrusions
18 On the Tools menu, click Align. This next process is very important. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion, it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. 19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.

700 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.

21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the center chase
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 24 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 25 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

Clean up the view
26 Zoom to Fit.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 701

27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. This will make subsequent work much easier.

Add the truss end extrusions
28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown.

29 On the Options Bar, select Add Parameter for Label. 30 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. 32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 34 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Sketch the right end extrusion
35 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 37 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 38 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name, and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

702 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.

42 On the Options Bar, enter19mm for Offset. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

44 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 703

46 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch the left end extrusion
49 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 51 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 52 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name, and click OK. 53 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 54 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 56 On the Options Bar, enter 19mm for Offset. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

704 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

58 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

60 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 61 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add alignment constraints
63 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends, they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu, click Align. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.

67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 705

68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side. TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the design
72 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 73 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 74 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply, and click OK.

75 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

76 Save the Family. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. If you are comfortable with your design, you can continue using it in the next lesson. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way, you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. 77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 707.

706 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Testing the Family in a Project
In this lesson, you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. After you load it into the project, you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.

Loading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls, a sill, and a rim joist. NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. Datasets

Open the truss family
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.

Open the project file

Click File menu ➤ Open.

Testing the Family in a Project | 707

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF1.rvt.

Load the truss family into the project
1 On the Window menu, clickm_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. If you had multiple projects or families open, a dialog would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Notice that the project file is now active. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. 4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 708.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project
In this exercise, you add several instances of the truss family to the project, and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

708 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

expand 3D Views. and double-click 3D . 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. 5 On the Options Bar. click Beam. double-click Level 1. The rim joist was added as a beam. and a wood rim joist. This project consists of foundation walls. 6 Using point-to-point insertion. and click Structural. therefore. a slab. 2 In the Project Browser. verify that Chain is not selected. expand Views. right-click in the Design Bar. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. a wood sill. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 709 .Southeast Isometric. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 4 In the Type Selector.

Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected.NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. You do not need to be precise.Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Project Browser. 710 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. 9 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. 7 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. not the wall or rim joist. double-click Level 1. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. under Floor Plans. double-click 3D .

click Undo Drag. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 711 . IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. 12 On the File menu. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length.Southeast Isometric.10 In the Project Browser. Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. 11 On the Edit menu. 13 In the Save as dialog. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. This should return the project to its original dimension. under 3D Views. double-click 3D . The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. In the next lesson. click Save as.

Level. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. 712 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 712. click Edit Family. click Yes. click Training Files. 5 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\Families\m_Wood_Web. Load the wood web family ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. 2 In the Project Browser. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Hide/Isolate.Edit a family from within a project 14 Select one of the wooden truss components. 4 On the View Control Bar.rfa is the active file. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. double-click Ref.rfa. Because the family is already open. 16 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. and click Hide Element. 15 On the Options Bar.

select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. 10 In the Project Browser. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. 7 In the Type Selector. 13 For the align-to point. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. In the following steps. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. You will align the left web component first. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. 9 On the Design Bar. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. Align the nested web components 12 Enter AL.This family is a single extrusion as shown. Adding a Nested Component | 713 . click Component. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. This will make aligning the wood web easier. Do not select it. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. click Modify. under Elevations. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss.

18 Add two reference planes as shown. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints.14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. 714 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. In addition. Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. click Ref Plane. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components.

23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. 25 Add the following two dimensions: Adding a Nested Component | 715 . Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. In the steps that follow. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. click Align. click Dimension.19 On the Tools menu.

You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Family Types dialog. click Add. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. ■ In the next exercise. ■ Right web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. 28 In the Save As dialog. “Creating Formula-controlled Parameters” on page 716. length. 27 On the File menu. you label these dimensions. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. or the width of the center chase. Place the dimension as shown. under Parameters. 26 On the Design Bar. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. you add new parameters to control the web components. click Save As. click Modify. 716 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase.Left web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. click Family Types. Place the dimension as shown. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters.

click Modify. In addition. 5 Click OK. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive.3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. and click Element Properties. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. click OK. and click OK. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Depth . Select Common for Discipline. Select Type. Select Length for Type. Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. 4 In the Family Types dialog. Click OK. 12 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select WebDepth. click Edit/New. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 717 . TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog to facilitate typing within the formula field. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. under Other. under Parameter Data. under Constraints. In the Type Properties dialog.

Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase
13 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:

Enter CC for Name. This parameter is primarily for convenience. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.

Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter
17 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

19 Under Constraints, enter (Length - (CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends, which must remain at least 150mm long.

Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter
20 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Integer for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

22 Under Constraints, enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. 23 Click OK.

718 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Add parameter to anchor web array
24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Webhalflength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. 28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add formula for Webhalflength
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 31 Under Constraints, enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 32 Click OK. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 719

Associate web component parameters
33 Right-click the left web component, and click Element Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select WebArrayLength, and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog, the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 37 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK. 38 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 40 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

Flex the design
41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog. 42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

44 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness.

720 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Click Apply, and click OK.

45 On the File menu, click Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Arraying Nested Subcomponents” on page 721.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents
In this exercise, you array the nested web components, add alignment constraints, and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

Array the left web component
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase.

3 On the Edit menu, click Array. Creating an array requires two basic steps. First, you specify the move start point; then you specify the move end point. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 4 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 721

6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

7 Press ENTER to complete the array. 8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Array the right nested web component
9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 10 On the Edit menu, click Array. 11 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom out to view the truss.

Align and lock the arrays
17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. 18 On the Tools menu, click Align.

722 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

19 In the left array, place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights, then select the line twice.

Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.

21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.

22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss.

Label the arrays
23 Select the middle web component of the left array. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it.

NOTE Do not select the array value. 25 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 28 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 723

30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.

33 Delete the dimension. 34 On the Tools menu, click Align. 35 Select the reference plane, Left, as the align-to point. 36 Select the reference plane, Member Left, and lock the alignment as shown.

Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value.

724 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any, significant impact. 37 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.

41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Change trimmable end length value
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 44 Click Apply, and click OK. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends.

Flex the design
45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing. 46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 12000mm for Length. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 725

TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced. 48 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 6000mm for Length. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. 49 On the File menu, click Save. 50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Reloading a Family into a Project” on page 726.

Reloading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you reload the truss family into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length.

726 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. In addition to the truss family, the project, m_WWF1.rvt, should be open. Close any other open projects.

Reload the truss into the project.
1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View, View 1, displays. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 3 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes.

4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. 6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes.

Reloading a Family into a Project | 727

7 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. In the next lesson, you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 728.

Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
In this lesson, you create and apply subcategories and materials. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application.

Creating and Applying Subcategories
In this exercise, you create new subcategories within the truss family. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF2.rvt.

728 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.

Apply Object Styles
1 Zoom in around beam system. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Within the family, the material values were set to By Category by default.

2 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 3 In the Object Styles dialog, verify that the Model Objects tab is selected, and expand the category Structural Framing. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. In addition, notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. 4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 729

5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 6 In the Materials dialog, click Wood - Timber for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. Notice the Wood - Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.

When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control over component visibility within a project. 8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.

Create subcategories within the truss family
9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 10 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 12 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 13 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss for Name, and click OK.

Apply material to subcategory
15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 16 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 17 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

19 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 20 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 21 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.

Apply the subcategory to the truss components
22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Other, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.

730 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

25 On the Options Bar, click

.

26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Apply a subcategory to the nested web components
28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. 29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. The web component family opens in a 3D view.

31 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 32 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Name, and click OK. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components, you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 731

34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 35 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 36 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK. 37 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

38 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 39 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. 41 Select the web extrusion. 42 On the Options Bar, click .

43 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory, and click OK.

Reload web component into truss family
44 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 46 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.

Reload truss into project
47 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 49 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components.

50 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 51 In the Object Styles dialog, under Categories, expand Structural Framing.

732 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Notice the two new subcategories are listed. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. 52 Click OK. 53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss Webs, and click OK. Notice the web extrusions no longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.

55 On the Edit menu, click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 56 On the File menu, click Save As. 57 In the Save as dialog, navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Material Parameters” on page 733.

Creating Material Parameters
In this exercise, you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise.

Open truss family for editing
1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create material parameter
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Material for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

7 In the Family Types dialog, notice the default material is By Category.

Creating Material Parameters | 733

In this case, do not assign a material to the parameter. When reloaded into a project, this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. 8 Click OK.

Link truss extrusions to material parameter
9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 10 On the Options Bar, click .

11 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the Material value field. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 21 Click OK twice. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 29 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.

734 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

32 On the File menu, click Save. 33 On the File menu, click Close. 34 Close any open files. You can save the open files if you wish. In the next lesson, a new dataset is supplied. 35 Proceed to the next lesson, “Controlling Component Visibility” on page 735.

Controlling Component Visibility
In this lesson, you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
In this exercise, you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels.

Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF3.rvt.

Change detail levels
1 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Controlling Component Visibility | 735

Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the truss, all elements display at all times in all views.

2 Select a floor truss. 3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Apply detail level controls to web components
5 Select a web component. 6 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 8 Select the web extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

11 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 13 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.

Assign detail level to center chase extrusions
14 Select the center chase extrusions. 15 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

736 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Assign detail level to truss ends
17 Select the end extrusions. 18 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Assign detail level to truss chords
20 Select the truss chords. 21 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■

Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed.

26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls | 737

Notice the symbolic representation of the beams.

29 On the File menu, click Save As. 30 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 31 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating Component Types” on page 738.

Creating Component Types
In this lesson, you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. In the final exercise, you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length.

Creating Multiple Component Types
In this exercise, you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project, creating predefined types can speed up the design process.

Open the truss family for editing
1 Select a floor truss. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create new types
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 6 In the New dialog, enter 89x38 for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 8 In the New dialog, enter 64x38 for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 64mm for Chord Width, and click Apply. Notice the chord changes width. 10 Select 89x38 for Name, and click Apply. The truss returns to its original designed value. NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 11 Click OK.

738 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. and click Yes. 400. click Save. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. if(Length < 9000.TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. select m_WWF3. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog. 16 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. “Creating Conditional Formulas” on page 739. 400))) 6 Click Apply. <result-if-true>. and click OK. click Family Types. click Modify. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. double-click 3D . 286. 2 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. select 89x38. 20 On the Design Bar.rvt.Southeast Isometric. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog. Creating Conditional Formulas | 739 . 18 In the Type Selector. click Load into Projects. if(Length < 7500. Notice the two beam types. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. select Override parameter values of existing types. 350. 21 In the Project Browser. Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions. select 64x38. 22 On the File menu. click Edit Family. 14 In the Reload Family dialog. click Beam.

click Save. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. and click Apply. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. double-click Level 1. Notice the truss depth increases. 11 In the Reload Family dialog.rvt. enter 6000 for length.Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog. 740 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Apply. and click Yes. under Floor Plans. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. under 3D Views. select m_WWF3. Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Family Types dialog. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D . and click OK. 16 On the File menu. click Load into Projects. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. select Override parameter values of existing types. 17 Close any open files. You have completed this tutorial. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth.Southeast Isometric. enter 8000 for length.

Using Advanced Features 7 741 .

742 | Chapter 18 Using Advanced Features .

To switch panel types. to resize the system. panel. Like windows. Like walls. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. and they are not windows. and mullions. you need to select a panel. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. grid lines.Curtain Systems 18 Curtain systems are not walls. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. you need to change the length of the wall. or you can use a specific curtain system command. To change grids. This affects the entire curtain system. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. Unlike windows. 743 . They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. For example. you select the grid. and you can change these elements individually.

1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. and double-click Ground Floor.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. click Wall. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Start the curtain system where shown.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. you create a curtain system using the wall command. 744 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. click Training Files.

Creating an Entrance | 745 .6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. and double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.

top constraint. using curtain grids. and room bounding. top and base attachments. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. For Top Offset. 746 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Click OK. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems.11 Select the curtain system. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and click (Properties). enter 1200.

27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. and click OK. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar.15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. and click OK. FIFTH FLOOR. FOURTH FLOOR. 26 While pressing CTRL. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 25 On the Design Bar. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view.a. right-click Elevation 1 . 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. click Modify. while pressing CTRL. click Curtain Grid. 18 In the Project Browser. THIRD FLOOR. SIXTH FLOOR. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Elevation. Creating an Entrance | 747 . and SEVENTH FLOOR. 20 In the drawing area. select SECOND FLOOR. and click Rename.

32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. click Modify. click Curtain Grid. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 33 On the Design Bar.The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. one larger than the other. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. Click to create a vertical grid. 748 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. Click to place another grid line.

you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. and then select the segment above it. you add a doorway to the curtain system. Instead of using the Door command. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. click Add or Remove Segments. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel.Next. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. The two segments are removed. The segment line style changes to dashed. and on the Options Bar. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Creating an Entrance | 749 . Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view.

39 On the Design Bar. and lock them. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. select One Segment. 750 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . click Curtain Grid. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown.38 Using the same method.

You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 52 On the Type Selector. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. click Training Files. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 54 On the Design Bar.43 Delete the dimensions. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. Next. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). click Modify. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. Use the following image as a guide. click in any white space to exit the editor. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it.rfa. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. The panel changes to a double door. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. Creating an Entrance | 751 .

65 On the View Control Bar. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 55 In the Project Browser. 752 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. not as curtain panels. 56 In the Project Browser. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel.These panels schedule as doors. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. They are part of the curtain panel category. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. under Floor Plans. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. The glazed panels display in blue. under Elevations. Now. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. on the new curtain system you added. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. This changes the graphics style of the view. 60 On the Type Selector. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 61 With the panel still selected. and click Wireframe. click System Panel : Solid. click . Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. double-click Entrance Elevation. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Next. 63 Click OK twice. click . and the solid panels display in white. 57 On the View Control Bar.

68 On the File menu. click Save As. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 753 . 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 2 On the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Entire Grid Line. click Mullion.rvt. select Grid Line Segment. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 4 On the Options Bar. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels.

11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 9 Delete the mullions below them. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. however. You are going to change some mullion joins.6 On the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select All Empty Segments. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. because their width reduces the size of the doors. there are a few that you do not want. so you remove them next. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. Two mullion join controls display. 754 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

you can also right-click. Finally. you add a curtain system using the wall command. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. double-click Southeast Isometric. 14 On the Design Bar.The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. click Modify. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 13 Click the top mullion control. Curved Curtain System | 755 . Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. Finally. 15 In the Project Browser. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. 16 Save the file. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above.

double-click GROUND FLOOR. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. For Top Offset. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. 756 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. (Arc passing through three points). enter 1200. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. under Floor Plans.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 Click . 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 4 In the Type Selector. for Top Constraint.

click Curtain Grid. Next. eighths. you place grids on the system. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. under Elevations.The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder. and then sixteenths. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. double-click East. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You are going to use one of these snaps points. Adding a Curved Curtain System | 757 . Divide the halves into quarters. Next. you change some panels in the system. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. 16 On the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. click Modify.

6 On the Options Bar. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 In the Project Browser. 758 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. select the bottom layer of panels. Remember to click elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. select Basic Wall: Generic . enter 100. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. double-click Exterior. 18 In the Type Selector.rft. click . Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. to filter out all other 19 Save the file. under Elevations.300mm. 4 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. for Depth. 5 On the Design Bar.

Pattern. select Curtain Panel . 12 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 21 In the Type Selector. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. clear Chain.rfa family. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 759 . and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 11 On the Design Bar.8 On the Design Bar. click Model Lines. right-click. All fourth floor panels are selected. . 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted.rfa. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Select the extrusion. and return to the project file. and save the family as Curtain Panel . for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory.Pattern. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.Pattern. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click . 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 14 On the Design Bar. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . select Glass. double-click FOURTH FLOOR.

The finished arc wall should look like the following image. 760 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . right-click. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. under Floor Plans. 26 In the Project Browser. 23 Right-click. 28 In the Type Selector. and then click (Dynamically Modify View). All the panels change to the solid panel. 29 Save the file. All fifth floor panels are selected. 25 Hold SHIFT and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.Solid. The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. select System Panel . This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. and click Flip Orientation.22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. click (Default 3D View). Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 27 Highlight a panel in the arc. 24 On the View toolbar.

click Lines. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Select Radius. and enter 50 mm for the radius. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. Click again to specify the ending point. For vertical mullions. click ■ ■ For Sides.rft. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. click Mullion. and select it. for Profile Usage. double-click East. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. . you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 761 . enter 8. select Mullion. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Elevations. click Training Files. 8 On the Design Bar.

17 On the Design Bar. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays.rfa. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown.rfa. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 19 On the Design Bar. click Mullion. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. clear Coarse and Medium. and return to the project file. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. and click OK. 28 Click . 30 Click . 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. and click Visibility. click Modify. select Circular Mullion for Family. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. click Training Files. click Detail Component. and click OK.rfa family. under 3D Views. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . clear Fine. 20 Select the detail component. double-click Southeast Isometric.detail. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. After the new profile is loaded. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Visibility. it can be added as a mullion type. 762 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 27 In the Project Browser.

select All Empty Segments. 38 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 36 Click OK twice. for Profile. so you remove the unwanted ones.32 Click Edit/New. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 40 In the Project Browser. right-click. In this lesson. 43 Save the file. under Floor Plans. click Duplicate. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. You have placed more mullions than you want. 34 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 39 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. double-click GROUND FLOOR. you learned to create a curved curtain system. and then apply those custom elements to the system. 41 Highlight a mullion in the arc. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 763 . 42 Press DELETE. 37 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 35 Under Construction. make custom curtain panels and mullions. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system.

764 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. Click OK. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 9 On the Design Bar. and press TAB.Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. click Finish Roof. under Floor Plans. select Defines slope. TIP To chain select all the walls. 5 On the Options Bar. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. enter 600. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. click Pick Walls. a storefront system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and you can click to select them all. and a ruled curtain system. click Roof Properties. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. All the inside faces highlight. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E.

12 Zoom in to the skylight. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Storefront System In this exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 18 Save the file. click Modify. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Mullion. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. 1 In the Project Browser. Storefront System | 765 . under Floor Plans. select Entire Grid Line. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar.10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View Control Bar.

5 On the Options Bar. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 766 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . click Wall.You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. 4 In the Type Selector. select Unconnected for Height. and enter 2400. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. To see how the grid layout is defined. Storefront System | 767 . The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. and press ENTER. click Modify. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. under 3D Views. and click . This specifies an exact length for the wall. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. double-click Southeast Isometric. which is specified in the type. even if the wall height changes. 8 Click the temporary dimension.The curtain wall cuts the original wall. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. enter 10200 mm. 9 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. For this wall. 12 Select the storefront wall. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm.

768 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 19 Select a curtain grid. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. enter 15. you find Number.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. 20 Save the file. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. By setting the Angle value. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. center. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. 1 In the Project Browser. or end. Angle. see the Revit Architecture help. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. click Mullion. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. and Offset. 16 Click OK. Justification. double-click Southeast Isometric. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. under 3D Views. select All Empty Segments. In this exercise. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model.

7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Curtain System by Lines | 769 .3 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. 6 Click the highlighted line. and highlight the model line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines.

10 Select the panel. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall.8 Select the highlighted line. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 770 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . and then eighths. quarters. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. A panel between the 2 lines is created. Next. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 11 Click OK. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. and click . click Curtain Grid. 9 On the Design Bar.

and define a ruled curtain system. and then eighths. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. quarters.This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 16 In the Type Selector. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. right-click. Curtain System by Lines | 771 . 18 Save the file. embed a curtain system inside another wall. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. Finally. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. select System Panel : Solid. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves.

772 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

Roofs 19 In this tutorial. In addition. 773 . you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2008. you learn how to add fascia. and soffits to the roofs that you create. gutters.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this lesson.rvt. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. and open Metric\m_Roofs. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Name. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and click OK. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser.Creating Roofs In this lesson. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. Before you can sketch the roof profile. 4 Click OK. You do not need to create the work plane. 774 | Chapter 19 Roofs . you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. and double-click Level 1. 5 In the Go To View dialog. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. and mansard roofs. expand Floor Plans. gable. expand Views (all). 3 In the Work Plane dialog. you learn to create several different types of roofs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. shed. including hip. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.

you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. centerline. click Ref Plane. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. Creating an Extruded Roof | 775 . click the blue square on the witness line. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and so on). 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof.The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline.

click Lines. select Chain. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Next. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. sketch the roof profile. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 13 On the Options Bar.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 776 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

17 On the Tools toolbar. click to display the model. and then select the exterior face of the wall. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. click . press TAB. 19 On the Tools toolbar. Next. 16 On the View toolbar. click . 18 Select the edge of the roof. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. Creating an Extruded Roof | 777 . 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls.The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. The roof should resemble the following illustration. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately.

21 In the Project Browser. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. click Modify. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. and select the second wall. press CTRL. and double-click Section 1. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Sections (Type 1). so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 24 On the Options Bar. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all).The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 778 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. click Attach for Top/Base. 26 On the View toolbar. “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 778.

7 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 9 Press CTRL. select both slope definition lines. clear Defines slope. Next. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 779 . and on the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. By default.To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. m_Roofs. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that Defines slope is selected. 3 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. click Pick Walls. click . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line.rvt. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. click Modify. The Element Properties dialog is displayed.

After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint.10 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 When you see the informational dialog. “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 780. expand Views (all). click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. m_Roofs.rvt. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. 11 On the Design Bar. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. and double-click Level 3. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. click Finish Roof. and click OK. 780 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. under Dimensions. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. clear Defines slope. 1 In the Project Browser. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. When you complete the roof.

and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. select Defines Slope. click Lines. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 781 . sketch the chimney opening. add new slope lines to the roof. 9 Using automatic snaps.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. click . 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 10 On the View menu. Next. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 6 Click to select all the walls. 13 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. Next. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. press TAB.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 782 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). 18 On the View toolbar. select Defines Slope. click Finish Roof.15 On the Options bar. “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 782. and enter 600 for Overhang. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2. m_Roofs. select Defines slope. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. Next. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Pick Walls. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 17 When you see the informational dialog. click to view the new roof in the model. close the roof sketch.rvt. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof.

click Roof Properties. 14 Under Constraints. 11 To trim the first line segment. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. using the following illustration for guidance. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Next. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 783 . 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. click . click Finish Roof. 7 On the Options Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. clear Defines Slope. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. select the left vertical slope definition line. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level.6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. and click . 10 On the Options Bar. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 9 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. 16 On the View toolbar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. and click OK. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. click to display the model.

click . 18 On the Design Bar. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. click Modify. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.17 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 784 | Chapter 19 Roofs . join the two remaining walls to the roof. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. 23 On the Tools toolbar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. Next. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.

press TAB. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way.The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 785. enter 0 for Overhang. expand Views (all). Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 785 . 4 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. clear Defines Slope. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. m_Roofs. and enter 300 for Overhang.rvt. click Pick Walls. and double-click Level 2. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Modify. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. select Defines slope. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select the left vertical roof line. 19 Click 20 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. Next. and click OK. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 16 Under Constraints. click . to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 786 | Chapter 19 Roofs .7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. you add a slope-defining line. Next. click Roof Properties. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 10 To trim the first line segment. click Finish Roof to complete the roof.

and double-click 3D. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 4 In the Project Browser. clear Defines Slope. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. To help locate the position of each split. you need to add two reference planes. m_Roofs. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 11 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 2. 3 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Tools menu.rvt. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Slope Arrow. Before you can add slope arrows. add two new slope arrows. click . 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 1 In the Project Browser. click Split Walls and Lines. expand 3D Views. “Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof” on page 787. expand Views (all). 5 On the View menu. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. Next. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch.21 Proceed to the next exercise. Next. and enter 600 for Offset. click Modify. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 787 . expand Views (all). and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. expand Floor Plans. click Ref Plane. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 14 On the Options Bar. verify is selected. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line.

expand Floor Plans. click Edit. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 500 for Rise/1000. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. When you sketch a hip roof. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. “Aligning Roof Eaves” on page 788. select both slope arrows. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. and double-click Garage Roof.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar.15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps.15 to add the second slope arrow. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). and then click OK. 20 Under Dimensions. and move the cursor to place the arrow. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and click 19 Under Constraints. . m_Roofs. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. select Slope for Specify. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 788 | Chapter 19 Roofs . When eave heights differ. 1 In the Project Browser. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 18 Press CTRL. the adjacent eave heights must align. select Defines Slope. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. click Modify.

“Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 789. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. and click OK. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 12 On the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. When aligning eaves. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. click . 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 789 . Next. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 10 On the Options Bar. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. under Dimensions. click to display the model. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. select a method to align the eaves. The eave lines display with a dimension. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. click Align Eaves. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 If you want to save your changes. 13 On the View toolbar. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. on the File menu.6 With the two gable end lines selected. click Save As. click Finish Roof.

select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select the roof and. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. on the Options Bar. under Constraints. click Training Files. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 On the View toolbar.rvt. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations. click Modify. and double-click North. 790 | Chapter 19 Roofs . expand Views (all). and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. click to display the model.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click .Next. and Soffits | 791 . click Lines. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. on the File menu. and click OK. 18 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. and double-click Level 3. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and soffits in Revit Architecture. click Modify. and Soffits In this lesson. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. gutters. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. Gutters. under Dimensions. expand Floor Plans. you can easily create its fascia. and select the remaining three lines. and soffits. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating Fascia. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. Creating Fascia. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. After you create a roof. and then select Defines slope. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. expand Views (all). gutters. you learn how to create roof fascia. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. click Finish Roof. click . Gutters. 7 In the Project Browser. press TAB.

you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 8 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 792 | Chapter 19 Roofs .rvt.rfa.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. 3 Press CTRL. enter Built-up Fascia. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. and click Open. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . and click OK twice. under Construction. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. click Training Files. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Common\c_Condominium. click Duplicate. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select Metal-Aluminum for Name. Creating Gutters In this exercise.rvt. click . click Modify to exit the Fascia command. . 4 In the Type Properties dialog.13 On the Design Bar. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. and click OK three times. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 10 Click to place the gutter. Creating Gutters | 793 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 In the Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and click OK. click in the Value field for Material. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. “Creating Gutters” on page 793. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 2 On the Options Bar. under Construction. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. c_Condominium. click Duplicate. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. c_Condominium. Creating Soffits In this exercise. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 794 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 4 Select the roof. click Pick Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. expand Views. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Roof. “Creating Soffits” on page 794. 3 On the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Floor Plans.

5 On the Design Bar. 9 If you want to save your changes. expand 3D Views. click Save As. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Join Geometry. Creating Soffits | 795 . 6 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). and double-click 3D. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Tools menu. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. and then select the soffit to join them. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. 8 Select the roof.

796 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

Finally.Area Analysis 20 In this tutorial. 797 . Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed.

and open Common\c_Area. 2 In the Project Units dialog. Click OK. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. 798 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . 3 Under Area. 4 In the Project Units dialog. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. In the final exercise. For Rounding. select mm. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. your values will be different. click OK. expand Views (all). click Training Files. click the Area Schemes tab. select 2 decimal places. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. These schemes define spatial relationships. under Length. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. select Millimeters. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. and click Room and Area. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. select m2 Click OK. select Square meters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Settings. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. If you are using metric units. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. expand Floor Plans. For Unit Suffix. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. For Unit Suffix. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. click Project Units. right-click in the Design Bar.rvt.

you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. click Area Plan. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. Click OK. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). If you select No. the system-computed height defaults to the level. forming a closed loop. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. 9 Click Cancel. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. it is not necessary in this exercise. under Views (all). click the Room Calculations tab. or 0. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. 12 When the informational dialog displays. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. When you select Yes in this dialog. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. 13 In the Project Browser. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 799 . you must manually add these boundary lines. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views.

rather than the area tag. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. common areas. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas.14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. you must select one of the reference lines. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. click Area Plan. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. you create a new area plan for rentable space. 800 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. click Area. Click OK. and store area. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. To modify the area. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Next.

23 On the Design Bar. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). When you pick the walls. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. click Area Boundary. you can either draw them or pick them. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. click Area. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. 21 On the Options Bar. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 801 . Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height.Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. When you add area boundary lines. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. If you do not select this option. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable).

30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. click Area. Click OK. 32 On the Options Bar. click . Select Office area for Area Type. 29 On the Design Bar.25 On the Design Bar. click . click Modify. click Modify and select the area. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. and click to select the area. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 31 On the Design Bar. 802 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 27 On the Options Bar.

35 Add an area to the building model core. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. enter Core for Name. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Click OK.33 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. In the Element Properties dialog. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. and select Store Area for Area Type. Click OK. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 803 . Select Office area for Area Type. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name.

38 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Color Scheme Legend.rvt. In this exercise. and click Save. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. and click to place the legend. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 804 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. name the project Area-in progress. 37 On the File menu. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Save. In the next exercise.Notice that within the two store areas. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. click the Fields tab. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. select Areas (Rentable). 7 Under Available fields. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 805 . 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog.3 When the dialog displays. select Area Type and click Add. 9 Click OK. under Category. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK.

806 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis .

you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. you then need to update the building face. In this tutorial. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. If you modify a massing face. and roofs. you can specify the view to display massing elements. building elements. After you make building elements.Massing 21 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. floors. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. curtain systems. or both. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. At any time. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. 807 . you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls.

click Training Files. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar.rvt. floor. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Create Mass. and cutting geometry. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. and click Massing. 808 | Chapter 21 Massing . The Design Bar title changes to Mass. roofs. sweeps.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. You assign the default wall. 5 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). and floors. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar.

19 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. on the Options Bar. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. and then click . under Materials and Finishes. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View toolbar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. click Extrusion Properties. 15 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 18 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. double-click Level 1. 16 On the Sketch Design Bar. on the Options Bar. click the Value for Material. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 8 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. and click 17 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. 10 In the Materials dialog. click . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 809 . under Views (all). under Constraints.

25 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. press TAB to highlight the entire face. 22 In the Materials dialog. under Views (all). double-click {3D} to see the results. select Pick a plane. TIP If necessary. click Finish Sketch. 20 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). click the Value for Material. under Constraints. 24 On the Design Bar. Continue creation of next massing form 26 In the Project Browser. and then click . and click OK. highlight the larger form. 29 In the drawing area. 810 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. double-click West. and click OK. The second form is on top of the first form. click Extrusion Properties. 28 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. select Mass (Transparent) for Name.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Materials and Finishes. 30 Click to select the face.

Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 811 . 33 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and click on the Options Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. TIP If you do not see this option. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line.31 On the Sketch Design Bar. 36 On the Options Bar. 35 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. click . and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. Sketch the blend base 32 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. Next. click . and click to select the line start point. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown.

double-click East. click 46 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. click . 42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. on the Options Bar.38 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). 41 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. Sketching the blend top 43 On the Design Bar. click Edit Top. 47 On the Options Bar. 40 On the Edit toolbar. click 48 Create an arc as shown. . 39 Select the arc and the horizontal line. and delete the vertical construction line. click Lines and. 45 On the Design Bar. 44 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 812 | Chapter 21 Massing . .

click . 52 On the View toolbar. and click OK. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model.49 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 51 On the Design Bar. click Blend Properties. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. In the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 813 . 53 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. 50 In the Element Properties dialog.

on the Options Bar. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 2 In the drawing area. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. click Extrusion Properties. snap the corners to the intersections. select the mass. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. and 0 for Extrusion Start. 814 | Chapter 21 Massing . 15 On the Design Bar. click and select Chain. 4 On the Options bar. When sketching each extrusion. under Floor Plans. click Lines and. double-click Level 1. 13 Under Constraints. click Ref Plane. 14 Click OK. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 7 Using the same technique. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. as shown. on the View Control Bar. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. m_Massing_Start. click and enter 15000 for Offset. 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). and then click Hidden Line. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 12 On the Design Bar. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion.rvt. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane.

18 On the File menu. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. click . 12000 mm for Height. click Family Types. you create new family types from a mass family file. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. click New. 4 In the Family Types dialog. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise.16 On the View toolbar. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. 3 In the Name dialog. 2 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. click Save As. and 18000 mm for Depth. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 15000 mm for Width. and click Apply. click Finish Mass. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 815 . under Other.rfa. Finally. 17 On the Mass Design Bar.rvt. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. In this exercise. 19 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete.

11000 mm for Height. and click OK. 9 Click OK. Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. click Save As. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 816 | Chapter 21 Massing . and click OK.5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. 18000 mm for Height. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name.rfa. and click Apply. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. You also load other existing mass families and place them. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. click Training Files. 1 If not already selected. and 6000 mm for Depth. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. 10 On the File menu. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. and click Apply. and 9000 mm for Depth. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place.

and Triangle. 23 On the Options Bar. 4 On the File menu. and click OK twice.rfa.2 In the Project Browser. 6 Open the Box-Training. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. select the triangle.rfa. double-click Site.rfa. 18 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. select Rotate after placement. Arc Dome. click Training Files. 16 On the Design Bar. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area.rfa family files. select the 3 boxes. 24 On the Design Bar. and click . click Modify. click Modify. 21 On the Options Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). 14 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 8 In the Type Selector. enter 90 for Angle. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. and click to place the mass. click Place Mass. 25 In the drawing area. click Place Mass. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. and click . 12 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 17 Press CTRL. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 817 . and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 11 Select the box. Semi Barrel Vault. under Floor Plans. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. click Place Mass. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 3 On the View Control Bar.

click Place Mass. 32 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. click . In the next exercise. click Orient ➤ Northeast. and click OK twice. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 818 | Chapter 21 Massing . and click . you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 33 On the View toolbar. 29 In the Type Selector. 30 Place the box mass family as shown.26 Select the triangle. 34 On the View menu. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. and click OK twice. 31 Select the box and click . 27 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. you join these mass elements. In this exercise.

4 Select the triangle. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. and then press ESC to see the result. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. NOTE When you join geometry. Joining Mass Elements | 819 .rvt file. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. . click . Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. click 2 On the Tools toolbar.

click 8 On the Options Bar. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. enter SM.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. click for Axis. double-click Site. on the Edit toolbar. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. under Floor Plans. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 820 | Chapter 21 Massing . 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. under Views (all). 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown.

The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 821 . and then select the triangle. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. 17 Press ESC to see the result. . click 14 On the Tools toolbar. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. click . You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. you joined mass elements together. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle.

You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 1 On the Design Bar. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. 8 On the Options Bar. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. (If Design Options is already selected. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. click . Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. under Floor Plans. 10 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. 822 | Chapter 21 Massing . 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog.rvt. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. clear Curved. click Place Mass. do not clear the check mark. enter 90 degrees for Angle. and select the triangle mass element. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. and then click OK. select Rotate after placement. 2 On the Window menu. double-click Site. click Modify. 5 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). select Sloped (primary). You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design.

19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. click . and click OK twice. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. 21 In the drawing area. 20 On the Design Bar. Mass Elements in Design Options | 823 .12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. under Elevations. double-click North. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. click Modify. select the three arc domes. 18 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. under Views (all). 14 In the drawing area. and click . select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 23 In the Project Browser. and click Wireframe. 16 On the View Control Bar. click Place Mass. click Modify. and click . Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar.

select Curved from the Design Option menu. 30 On the View menu. and click OK. select Curved. TIP To find the correct shapes. click the Design Options tab. click Visibility/Graphics. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. click . and click Wireframe. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault.24 On the View Control Bar. While pressing CTRL. clear Sloped. under 3D Views. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. Create a Design Option set 26 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. click . double-click {3D}. 29 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). and watch the status bar. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. 32 Click the value for Design Option. 824 | Chapter 21 Massing .

35 Close the warning that displays. 36 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Make Primary. you placed mass elements into Design Options. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components.You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option.rvt. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. under Option. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 825 . 33 On the Design Options toolbar. you can make it the primary option. click . you pick massing faces to create walls. and click Close. 34 In the Design Options dialog. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. select Curved and. In this exercise. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes.

7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. 826 | Chapter 21 Massing . and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. click to show the massing model. 5 In the Type Selector. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). under Views (all). 3 On the View menu. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. click . double-click {3D}. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. 8 In the Project Browser. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.Brick on CMU. 6 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View toolbar. select Basic Wall: Exterior .1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 3. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Orient ➤ Southeast.

double-click Level 5. 11 In the Project Browser. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. 14 In the Project Browser. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 15 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 16 In the Type Selector.NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. 12 On the Design Bar. 18 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 827 . select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown.

If desired. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. and click Wireframe. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. you pick massing faces to create floors. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. In this exercise. 21 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 9. 828 | Chapter 21 Massing . you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. under Views (all).You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. click .

Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Floor Area Faces. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 829 . Curtain Systems. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. clear Curtain Panels. 6 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Model Categories tab. and click OK. and Walls. 4 Click OK. 2 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. select all levels.rvt.

click Orient ➤ Northeast. click Floor Area Faces. 11 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Modify. 830 | Chapter 21 Massing . and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 9 On the View menu. 10 Press CTRL.8 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. select Levels 1-4.

23 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 18 In the Project Browser. click Modify. clear Exclude Options. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Floor Area Faces. and click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 17 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 831 . click Floor by Face. double-click Level 1. click . select Level 1.13 On the Design Bar. 15 Press CTRL. 20 On the Options Bar. click Create Floors. 21 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces.

you pick massing faces to create roofs.24 In the Project Browser. double-click Mass Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. In this exercise. 832 | Chapter 21 Massing . You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.

click Roof by Face. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. select Basic Roof : Generic .Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 4 In the Type Selector. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof.400mm.rvt. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 833 . click Create Roof. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. under Views (all).

7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. In this exercise. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. Curtain Systems.Your model should now look as shown. 11 On the View menu. and then click OK. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. click Create Roof. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. and Walls. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 9 On the Options Bar. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. click Visibility/Graphics. select Curtain Panels. 834 | Chapter 21 Massing .

1 In the Project Browser.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Create System. click Curtain System by Face. 5 Press CTRL. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click {3D}.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 3 In the Type Selector. Creating Curtain Systems | 835 . under Views (all). be sure that Select Multiple is selected.

select the blended form on the in-place mass. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. 836 | Chapter 21 Massing .7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes.

you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. 10 Click Modify to exit the command.9 On the Options Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 837 . In this exercise. click Create System. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.

click Edit/New. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 30000 for Width. clear Curtain Panels. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Next. Curtain Systems. 838 | Chapter 21 Massing . under Floor Plans. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. under Views (all). and Walls. Floors. click Visibility/Graphics. click OK.rvt. 2 On the View menu. and click OK. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and click OK. and then click OK. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . 1 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click Site. Roofs.

click Modify. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 839 . clear Exclude Options. 11 On the Options Bar.10 On the Design Bar.

The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. under Views (all). 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. Also. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 840 | Chapter 21 Massing . TIP To select the curtain wall. click OK. under Floor Plans. In the next steps. 19 On the View toolbar. you want to select the smaller one. double-click Level 1. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 17 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Project Browser. click Remake. click . 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown.

Editing Elements Created from Massings | 841 . 21 On the Options Bar.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. 20 Select the roof as shown. click Remake. you will notice that Revit Architecture resized the floors.

you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. In this exercise. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. you changed the size of an existing mass family.rvt. 842 | Chapter 21 Massing . 1 Open the 3D view. and click Remake.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise.

Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 On the Model Categories tab.Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing.Massing only. 8 Click None to clear the selection. right-click on the 3D view. click All to select all categories. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 843 . The 3D view now shows only the building shell. and click OK. 4 Rename the view 3D . 9 Select Mass.

This concludes the massing tutorial. 844 | Chapter 21 Massing . such as columns and an extruded roof. to the building shell.In this exercise. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. You might create the model shown. If desired. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.

By grouping objects. and modify repetitive units. 845 .Grouping 22 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2008. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. For example. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. In this tutorial. place. you not only simplify their placement. you also simplify the modification process. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. You can also nest groups within other groups. all instances in the building model are updated. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group.

and double-click First Floor. the host group is also updated automatically. hotel rooms. expand Views (all). You mirror one instance of the group. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and typical office layouts.rvt. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. expand Floor Plans. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. After you create a model group. click Training Files. 846 | Chapter 22 Grouping . you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium.Creating. When you make changes to a nested group. In another exercise. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. Modifying. In this exercise. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you add the new model group to a previously created group. The new group is considered nested within the host group.

3 Draw a selection box around the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 847 . 4 On the Edit toolbar. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen.2 Enter ZR. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. and click OK.

7 On the Design Bar. click Zoom To Fit. 8 On the View toolbar. Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. Zoom flyout. click Modify. 848 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin.The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.

and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. right-click Typical Kitchen.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. expand Model. and click Create Instance. Creating and Placing a Group | 849 . under Groups. click Modify.

16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 850 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click (Mirror). 14 On the Edit toolbar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. clear Copy. 15 On the Options Bar.

and on the toolbar. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 851 . click (Rotate).17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

852 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 21 On the Zoom flyout.19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click Modify. click Zoom To Fit. 20 On the Design Bar.

name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. as shown. Modifying a Group | 853 . Save the dataset 22 On the File menu. Modifying a Group In this exercise. click Save As. and one rotated.rvt. and click Save. When you finish editing.You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. one mirrored. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. you make changes to an instance of a group.rvt. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

7 Click (Exclude group member). 854 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and click to select the wall. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. press TAB to highlight the wall. press TAB. and click to select the door. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. 5 Click (Exclude group member). select the element. press TAB. 3 Click (Exclude group member). (Include group member). and click to select it. and click 4 Move the cursor over the door.2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. NOTE To display an excluded element.

move the cursor to the left. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 13 On the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement.8 On the Design Bar. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Options Bar.127mm. select Basic Wall : Generic . click Door. 14 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. Modifying a Group | 855 . click Wall. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.

select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. click Zoom To Fit. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. move the cursor up. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. click Modify. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 856 | Chapter 22 Grouping . Zoom flyout. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 23 In the drawing area. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner.17 On the Design Bar. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 21 On the Options Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. In edit group mode. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Edit Group.

30 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 28 For Base Offset. under Floor Plans. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. double-click First Floor. Nesting Groups | 857 . When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. you add the Typical Kitchen group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 26 Select the opening. in the Project Browser. 29 In the group editor toolbar. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. Nesting Groups In this exercise. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. created in an earlier lesson. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. click Finish. for Unconnected Height. which acts as the host. click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. enter 2134. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. enter 1000. click Properties.rvt. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. and click OK. under Constraints. and on the Options Bar.

5 In the drawing area. click Edit Group. 858 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 4 In the group editor toolbar. 3 On the Options Bar. select the Typical Kitchen group.2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. click (Add to Group).

You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. 8 In the Project Browser. Working with Detail Groups | 859 . such as text. under Floor Plans. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. select the wall between the folding doors. click Finish. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. you add door tags to a group. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. and each of the bifold doors. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. and create an attached detail group containing the tags.6 Press TAB. double-click Second Floor. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. such as door and window tags. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. 7 In the group editor toolbar. In the next exercise. and filled regions. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click Filled Region. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model.rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. double-click First Floor. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 4 On the Options Bar.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 860 | Chapter 22 Grouping . under Floor Plans. click to draw a rectangular region.

Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click Text. click Finish Sketch. 9 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Creating a Detail Group | 861 . and select a point below the left elevator. click to add an arc leader. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 7 On the Design Bar. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 12 Enter Tile. and on the Design Bar.

Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. as shown. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. click (Group). under Groups. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. and select the note and the filled region. 862 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. under Floor Plans. expand Detail. double-click Second Floor. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. 16 In the drawing area. click Modify. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 19 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and click OK.The text note with arc leader is added to the building model.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. click to place the detail group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Because the detail group contains variables. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group.rvt.21 In the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. double-click First Floor. Using Attached Detail Groups | 863 . it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader. click Modify 23 On the Zoom flyout.

draw a selection box around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. click Modify. click (Filter Selection). Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Options Bar. click (Group). 864 | Chapter 22 Grouping . as shown: 5 On the Design Bar. click Check None.4 Place door tags in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 8 In the Filter dialog. select Door Tags. and click OK.

under Floor Plans. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Place Detail. for Attached Detail Group Name. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. therefore. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Using Attached Detail Groups | 865 . enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. and click OK.10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached.

browse to the Desktop. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. and click Open.16 On the Design Bar. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. for Create new.rvt. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. verify that Project is selected. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. under Groups\Model. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. click Desktop. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). In this case. click New ➤ Project. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. click OK. and click Save. 866 | Chapter 22 Grouping . m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. select 2 Bedroom Unit. accept the default template file. 5 In the New Project dialog. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click Save Group. verify that Same as group name is selected. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project.rvt. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. click Modify. 3 For File name. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. click Use Existing. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. and on the Options Bar. expand Groups. and expand Model. Saving and Loading Groups | 867 . either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. click Modify.A warning dialog is displayed. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Link. When a group is converted to a link. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. and click Create Instance. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 12 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.

but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project.17 On the Design Bar. select the linked Revit model. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. and the link is removed. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 868 | Chapter 22 Grouping . This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Remove Link. 24 In the message dialog.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 20 On the Options Bar. and click OK. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Modify. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Attached Details is selected only. expand Revit Links. 18 In the Project Browser. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click Bind. click OK.

Site 23 In this tutorial. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to add and modify site components within a project. 869 .

click Point. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. click Training Files. you create a toposurface using two different methods. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. convert the data to a table. islands. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. 870 | Chapter 23 Site . enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. right-click in the Design Bar. Using the first method. and double-click Site. expand Floor Plans. click Toposurface.rvt. In the second part of this exercise. In the final exercises. expand Views (all). 3 On the Design Bar. This project file was created using the default metric template. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. and open Metric\m_First_Project. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. and then modify the data. and walkways. you add a building pad to the site.Using Site Tools In this lesson. 4 On the Options Bar. and click Site. You add property lines manually. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface.

Use the following illustration as a reference. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Creating a Toposurface | 871 .

and 18000 mm absolute elevations. under Additional Contours. click Finish Surface. under Increment. 13 In the Site Settings dialog.TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 872 | Chapter 23 Site . enter 1500 mm. 12000 mm. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Settings menu. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. and click OK. 15000 mm. click Site Settings. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. Use the following illustration as a reference.

click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. 14 On the View toolbar. click Yes. rename the level Base Site Elevation. 18 In the Project Browser. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. and press ENTER. click . click to delete it. modify the level names and elevations. on the Standard toolbar. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. 15 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). click the elevation value. and press ENTER. enter 1000 mm. 21 Click the Level 2 text. and double-click South. 23 Click the Level 1 text. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Shading with Edges. Before importing the contour data. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. click Model Graphics Style.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. rename the level Basement. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. and press ENTER. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Creating a Toposurface | 873 . 16 On the View toolbar.

25 On the File menu. Click Open. Under Import or Link. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. 31 On the Design Bar. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. double-click Site. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 30 On the Edit menu. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Modify. 28 On the Design Bar. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. click Pin Position. select Preserve colors. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. and click OK.24 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Under Layer/Level Colors. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. it is considered an import symbol. 874 | Chapter 23 Site . 29 Select the imported topography. clear Current view only and choose Select for Layers. click Training Files. under Views (all). Until it is exploded. under Floor Plans.

35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. Creating a Toposurface | 875 . When you select the import symbol.Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. clear Elevations. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click Toposurface. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select it. 32 On the View menu. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. and click OK. when the edges highlight. click Visibility/Graphics. and then click OK. 34 Under Visibility. clear C_INDX. click the Annotation Categories tab. 36 On the Design Bar.

40 On the View toolbar. you add property lines using two methods. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 876 | Chapter 23 Site . and click Save. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 42 On the View toolbar. this project file is required in its current state. 43 On the File menu. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. click . click Finish Surface. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. Using the first method. name the project Site-in progress. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 39 On the Design Bar. click Save As. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. Using the second method.rvt. “Adding Property Lines” on page 876.

On the Design Bar. click Property Line. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. do so before continuing. select Create property lines by sketching.rvt. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Using the 3-point Arc tool. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Select and delete the right vertical line. click Lines. Site-in progress. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Click Modify. and click OK. double-click Site. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. under Floor Plans. Adding Property Lines | 877 . NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. click Lines. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. add an arc line on the right.

click Property Line. select the lines. 15 Starting in Row #1. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ to delete them. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. click OK. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. on the Standard toolbar. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 9 In the warning dialog. 14 In the Property Lines dialog. when they highlight. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. A warning dialog is displayed. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. and click OK. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. click Finish Sketch. select Edit Table. click 12 On the Design Bar. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E 878 | Chapter 23 Site . 8 On the Options Bar. click OK.6 On the Design Bar.

17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. Adding Property Lines | 879 . 23 On the View menu. 20 Click Load. and click OK. Before adding property line segment tags. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. If the gap is not closed. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 19 In the Tags dialog. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. 22 In the Tags dialog. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. click Training Files. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off.dwg and click OK.Notice that after you complete the last line. click the Imported Categories tab. click to place the property lines. 16 Click OK. This means there is no gap in the property lines. click Visibility/Graphics. 25 Under Visibility.rfa. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. 880 | Chapter 23 Site . In the next exercise. click Save. In this exercise. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. clear Leader.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. 31 On the File menu. right-click in the Design Bar. you created two sets of property lines. “Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings” on page 880. 27 On the Options Bar. In the final step. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. and click Shading with Edges. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. and click Drafting. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. click Tag ➤ By Category. this project file is required in its current state. click Model Graphics Style. 30 On the View Control Bar. click to place it. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. The tags display more prominently in this view. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.

click Model Graphics Style. and click Wireframe. 10 Under Additional Contours. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. enter 1000. select a shade of Brown. click Object Styles. select Dash dot. click Site Settings. select Topography. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. select Single Value. Site-in progress.rvt. Under Line Color.0 mm. 7 Click OK.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 881 . specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. Under Line Pattern. click New. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. for Subcategory. In the Object Styles dialog. under Contour Line Display. Under Subcategory. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. 2 On the Settings menu. and click OK. enter the name Working Contour. select Working Contour. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Under Range Type.

12 On the File menu. such as material. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces.11 Click OK. “Creating Topographic Subregions” on page 882. Working Contour. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. The next exercise requires a new dataset. 882 | Chapter 23 Site . You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. parking areas. click Close. parking areas. The object style subcategory. you create topographic subregions to define roads. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. and islands. and islands. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. you create subregions in order to define roads. In this exercise. In the next exercise. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties.

click Lines. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. In the left pane of the Open dialog. try to replicate the location and proportion.rvt. Although the exact dimensions are not important. click Training Files. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. 2 On the Design Bar. click Subregion. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Site. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 883 . the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner.

NOTE In the Metric dataset. and click OK. select Site . 6 In the Materials dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. 9 On the View menu. 8 On the Design Bar. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. click the Value for Material. under Materials and Finishes. 884 | Chapter 23 Site . and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. and click OK. enter Parking for Name. click Finish Sketch. click Shading with Edges. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. under Identity Data. click Properties. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.Tarmacadam for Name.

16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. under Schedules/Quantities. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. Creating Topographic Subregions | 885 . and double-click Topography Schedule. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. expand Schedules/Quantities.Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site .Tarmacadam. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Topography Schedule. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. click Model Graphics Style. 12 On the View Control Bar. they display within this schedule. Notice that the project area has increased. 17 On the View Control Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. Delete overlapping lines. under Floor Plans. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. As you create new subregions. double-click Site. and click Shading with Edges. click Edit Boundary.

and click OK. under Floor Plans. under Schedules/Quantities. 28 On the Design Bar. select Site . 30 In the Project Browser. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. click Model Graphics Style. click Subregion. and click Shading with Edges. click Finish Sketch. click Model Graphics Style. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. In this training project. double-click Site. 29 On the View Control Bar. enter Island . click Properties. under Identity Data. 26 In the Materials dialog. click Lines. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. 886 | Chapter 23 Site . under Materials and Finishes.Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser.Grass for Name. 24 On the Design Bar. click the Value for Material. 22 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. and click Hidden Line. double-click Topography Schedule.Grass for Name. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. 23 In the upper-right parking area. 20 On the View Control Bar. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. and click OK. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Within each subregion.

add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration.Grass. and apply the material Site . double-click Topography Schedule. Name each region Island . click Lines. double-click Site.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . under Floor Plans. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. under Floor Plans. Creating Topographic Subregions | 887 . and apply the material Concrete . You must sketch each region separately. Name the subregion Walkway. 35 On the Design Bar. click Subregion. 32 In the Project Browser. Notice that the schedule has been updated.31 In the Project Browser. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser.Grass. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Site. 34 On the Design Bar.walkway.

WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. under Schedules/Quantities. 38 In the Project Browser. Notice that the schedule has been updated. click Finish Sketch. click Save As. there is still only one toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 37 On the Design Bar. 39 On the File menu. 888 | Chapter 23 Site . If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion.

Site tutorial-in progress. and click OK. see the tutorial. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.rvt.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. under Phasing. Grading the Toposurface | 889 . and click Save. A warning dialog is displayed. select Existing for Phase Created. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. click . you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area.40 Navigate to your preferred folder. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. this project file is required in its current state. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. 2 Select the toposurface. “Using Phasing” on page 992. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. When you use the grading tool. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 5 On the Design Bar. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. “Grading the Toposurface” on page 889.

6 On the Design Bar. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. 8 Select the topographic surface. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. click Graded Region. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 890 | Chapter 23 Site . select Copy Internal Points. and click Select and Edit.

12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. and click Hidden Line. Grading the Toposurface | 891 . 13 Press DELETE.10 Press DELETE. and new. demolished.

17 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click Point. 18 On the View toolbar. click . 15 On the Options Bar. click Finish Surface. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 20 On the View toolbar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. and click Shading with Edges. 892 | Chapter 23 Site . click . Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway.Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

25 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt.The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. Therefore. and delete it. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. Adding a Building Pad | 893 . under Phasing. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. Only the graded topography displays. click Save. click View Properties. “Adding a Building Pad” on page 893. specify Existing for Phase. Site tutorial-in progress. 24 On the View menu. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. specify New Construction for Phase. you create a building pad. 26 On the File menu. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. click View Properties. and click OK. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 23 Select the toposurface. and click OK. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. When you add a building pad. this project file is required in its current state. you can delete it. under Phasing. only the original toposurface displays.

Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. NOTE By default. 4 On the Design Bar. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style. If you have an existing building model. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. the Pick Walls command is active. 894 | Chapter 23 Site . 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. double-click Site. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. click Lines. under Floor Plans. click Pad. 2 On the View Control Bar.

click Save. “Adding Site Components” on page 895. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. . click Finish Sketch. click 9 On the View toolbar. and click Shading with Edges. click Model Graphics Style. click building pad. Adding Site Components | 895 . Adding Site Components In this exercise. 7 On the View Control Bar. 8 On the View toolbar.6 On the Design Bar. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice the new 10 On the File menu. this project file is required in its current state.

NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. click Modify. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector.rvt. 896 | Chapter 23 Site . select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . Site tutorial-in progress. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. double-click Site. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.90 deg. and select the parking space. click Parking Component. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Site Component. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. .7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. click 9 On the View toolbar. . TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. double-click Site. click parking spaces. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. Notice the new Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. 8 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. Adding Site Components | 897 .

click . 13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below.12 In the Type Selector. choose any tree type. 898 | Chapter 23 Site . and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. 14 On the View toolbar.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. “Tagging Site and Parking Components” on page 899. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. this project file is required in its current state.rvt. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Save. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Site tutorial-in progress. double-click Site. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click . click Tag All Not Tagged.15 On the View toolbar. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 899 .

7 On the File menu. and click OK. and click OK. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. “Creating Parking Space Schedules” on page 900. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. click the Fields tab. In the following exercise. select Parking for Category. click Hidden Line. 5 On the View menu. 900 | Chapter 23 Site . 8 Proceed to the next exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. click Save. Site tutorial-in progress. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. and click Apply. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 4 Under Available fields. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state. click Apply. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces.3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space.rvt. select Mark. you create a parking schedule.

If necessary. The parking schedule is displayed. under Floor Plans. finish numbering the remaining spaces. and click Add. double-click Site. select Type. 11 On the Window menu. enter Size.5 Under Available fields. 13 In the Parking Schedule. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. click Close Hidden Windows. under Space. select Type. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 901 . select Mark. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. enter Space. under Space. 6 Click the Formatting tab. 8 Under Fields. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. under Views (all). zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. 9 On the Window menu. 7 Under Fields. 10 In the Project Browser. and under Heading. click Save. and under Heading. 12 In the Site plan. and click OK. number the first three spaces consecutively. 14 In the Parking Schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 15 On the File menu. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. click Tile.

902 | Chapter 23 Site .

After completing level 1. you use the structural tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to create a building model skeleton. You begin by adding the structural walls. 903 . you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. and beams to Level 1. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. columns.Structural 24 In this tutorial. In the final lesson.

Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the File menu. 4 In the Import/Link dialog.dwg. under Floor Plans. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. under Views (all). go to the Project Browser. under Import or Link. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and select Metric\m_Wall_Import. click Training Files. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. 904 | Chapter 24 Structural . specify the following: ■ Select Link (instead of import). and double-click Level 2.rvt. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. and open Metric\m_Structural. If necessary. click Training Files.

In this exercise. After you trace the walls. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.■ ■ Select Current view only. 8 On the File menu.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. Sketching Structural Walls | 905 . right-click in the Design Bar and click Structural. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. This file is used in the next exercise. select Invert colors. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the structural tab is not displayed. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. 7 Click Open.rvt. and select Origin to origin. “Sketching Structural Walls” on page 905. Select All for Layers. Structural_tutorial. you imported a DWG file. to trace the initial set of structural walls. select Automatically place. click Save As. 6 Under Positioning.

In addition. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the wall endpoint. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. specify the following: ■ Select Depth.Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. In the steps that follow.200mm. 906 | Chapter 24 Structural . their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. select Basic Wall: Generic . rather than the height. click Structural Wall. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 6 On the Options Bar. you add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. First. Click . Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. 5 In the Type Selector. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines.

13 On the View toolbar. click Modify to finish the sketch. 10 Move the curser to the right. 12 On the Design Bar. and click to complete the chain of walls. click . and click the next line intersection. Sketching Structural Walls | 907 . 11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. and click to specify the next wall endpoint.9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection.

zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. click Structural Wall. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. Use the Dynamic 14 In the Project Browser. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking View tools to modify the 3D view. ■ ■ 908 | Chapter 24 Structural . When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. and double-click Level 2. 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. in the View toolbar. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C.TIP If necessary.

double-click Level 2. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. Click to create a three-point arc. click Modify to end the wall chain. click the Imported Categories tab. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Structural Wall. 23 Under Visibility.18 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. 19 On the View toolbar.200mm. clear m_Wall_Import. under Floor Plans. select Basic Wall: Generic . Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. ■ Sketching Structural Walls | 909 . specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. 25 In the Type Selector.dwg and click OK. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. 21 On the View menu. click .

click .27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. 28 On the Options Bar. 29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. 910 | Chapter 24 Structural . This is the right extent of the arc. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. This is the left extent of the arc.

If it is not. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. and press Enter. Sketching Structural Walls | 911 . click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. enter 1500. enter 1500. 34 Select the horizontal wall. click Modify.32 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click the value.

38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown.35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. 912 | Chapter 24 Structural . Both walls are 1200 mm long. clear Chain. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint and wall centerline shown in the illustration below. 36 On the Design Bar. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. In the steps that follow. you create the final structural walls for the project.

Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 913 .rvt. double-click Level 2. In the next exercise. click Modify. You then make minor modifications to their position. Floor Plans. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 42 On the File menu. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. in its current state. 40 On the Design Bar. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. 41 On the View toolbar. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. click .39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. In this exercise. This project file is required. under Views (all). “Dimensioning and Modifying Walls” on page 913. click Save. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. Structural_tutorial.

select it. and click to place the dimension as shown. click Options to specify the wall pick options. Select Entire Walls for Pick. 914 | Chapter 24 Structural . and click OK. 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. and when it highlights. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. 6 Move the cursor to the left. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. select Intersecting Walls. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . the Options button becomes available. click Dimension. After you select Entire Walls. 4 On the Options Bar. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. click Modify.

Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 915 . 9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal.8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown.

In the next lesson. 916 | Chapter 24 Structural . You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. 12 On the Edit menu. click Save. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. “Adding Structural Columns and Beams” on page 916. several different beam types. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. in its current state.11 Click the temporary dimension value. joists. you add structural columns. click Undo Edit Dimension Length. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. 13 On the File menu. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. This project file is required. Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. In this exercise.

you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. If necessary. Adding Structural Columns | 917 . In addition. zoom in to place the column. and you add a column outside the grids. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. select Height and specify Level 2. double-click Level 1. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. Structural_tutorial. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Structural Column. 2 On the View menu. you use the grid intersection tool. under Floor Plans. TIP When adding the column. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

and select grids 1-5. 918 | Chapter 24 Structural . and A. click Grid Intersection.7 Add similar columns to C2. 9 Use a crossing selection. C3. and C5. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids.

and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. Columns A3-5 are shown below.TIP To create the crossing selection. Adding Structural Columns | 919 . Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. 10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position.

you could not have rotated them independently of each other. Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. click Grid Intersection. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. zoom out until you can see all the grids. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. click Modify. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. Columns B3-5 are shown below. click Structural Column. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. click Finish. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. 920 | Chapter 24 Structural . 15 On the Options Bar. This completes this set of columns. click Finish. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR.14 If necessary. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. 20 On the Design Bar.

you learn how to work with these varied conditions. In the next exercise. As you use the beam tool. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 921 . and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. you add beams manually. you add structural beams to the building model. in its current state. “Adding Structural Beams and Girders” on page 921. you used various methods to add structural columns. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. In this exercise. click . click Modify. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. click Save.24 On the Design Bar. 26 On the File menu. 25 On the View toolbar. This project file is required.

3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 7 On the Design Bar. 922 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Beam. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. click Modify. 4 In the Type Selector. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. 2 On the View menu. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. Start the beam at the column midpoint and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall centerline.Dataset This exercise requires the project file.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Structural_tutorial. double-click Level 2.

the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. Column Brace Horizontal Bracing Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns.9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Grid. 11 On the Options Bar. Use the following table for other conditions. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. 10 In the Type Selector. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 923 . if a beam is joined column-to-column. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67.7. click Beam. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. When you use the grid tool to place beams. select Girder for Usage. Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. For example. and then move the cursor up to grid A. 14 On the Options Bar.

enter 8200. 23 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Finish. 24 Select grid 3. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. 21 On the Design Bar. click Grid. and select grid C. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. 18 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Type Selector.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. click Beam. and press ENTER. click the temporary dimension value. press and hold CTRL. 924 | Chapter 24 Structural . select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67.

27 Using point-to-point insertion. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. click Finish. select Girder. 25 On the Options Bar. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 925 . Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar.Notice beams are added between columns. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. Click column B5 to add the first beam. select Chain. In addition. Press ESC to end the chain. and for Usage. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain.

You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. select Girder for Usage.28 On the Options Bar. You can also use the shortcut key. connecting the column at B4. Press ESC to end the chain. select Girder for Usage. SI. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. Press ESC to end the chain. 29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. 30 On the Options Bar. to snap only to intersections. 926 | Chapter 24 Structural . NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4.

Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. If the W310x32. click Finish. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 927 . 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first.7 beam had crossed grid A. 34 On the Options Bar. 33 Select grid A. 36 On the Options Bar. click Grid.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. click Grid.

double-click Level 2. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. 928 | Chapter 24 Structural . 39 On the View toolbar. click . select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser. In the steps that follow. click Beam. 45 Specify the beam start point at the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. 44 On the Options Bar.37 Select grid B. 43 In the Type Selector. select Girder for Usage. 38 On the Options Bar. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grid 4 and 5. under Floor Plans. click Finish. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. 48 On the View toolbar. click Modify. 47 On the Design Bar. click . Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 929 .46 Move the cursor to the right. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints).

and click when it intersects grid 2. double-click Level 2. select Girder.Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser. 930 | Chapter 24 Structural . In the steps that follow. 53 On the Options Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. for Usage. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall and grid 3. and select Chain. 52 In the Type Selector. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. under Floor Plans. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. click Beam. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3.

57 On the View toolbar.56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. and click when it intersects grid 1. click . Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 931 .

For example. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.58 On the File menu.7. “Adding Joists and Purlins ” on page 932. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. 2 Zoom around the A1 . This project file is required. in its current state. you add joists and purlins to the building model. Structural_tutorial. for Usage. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. you add joists and purlins to the building model. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid one. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. click Save. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. 932 | Chapter 24 Structural . select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. In this exercise. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. 6 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. select Automatic. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 5 On the Options Bar.B3 quadrants. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. 4 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. You then create a joist array. In the next exercise. double-click Level 2. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. click Beam. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise.

click on the Options Bar. Adding Joists and Purlins | 933 . 11 Click OK. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. Create a joist array 12 With the joist selected. click Modify. 8 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. you selected the Automatic option. 9 With the beam selected. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. notice that the Structural Usage value is Joist.7 On the Design Bar. click Array. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. According to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. under Structural. on the Edit menu. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected.

15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. specify the following: Click . This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. 934 | Chapter 24 Structural . Enter 14 for Number. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. Select 2nd for Move to. Once the direction is set. enter 1250 and press ENTER. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.13 On the Options Bar.

Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. 17 Add a beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. Adding Joists and Purlins | 935 .

19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. specify the following: Click . Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage parameter value. Select 2nd for Move to. and click. 21 On the Options Bar. joists. and color within the Object Styles dialog. and purlins. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. Enter 7 for Number. style. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point. 936 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Array.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. 20 On the Edit menu.

Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. 26 In the Filter dialog. Adding Joists and Purlins | 937 . and click OK.The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. clear all options except Structural Framing (Girder) and Structural Framing (Joist). change the following instance parameters: ■ Select Moment Connection Last. 25 On the Options Bar. under Other. click . 27 On the Options Bar. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. click . 28 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Save. In the next lesson. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. click Modify. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. 30 On the View toolbar. in its current state. Click OK. 31 On the File menu. and notice the connection symbols display. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level.■ ■ Select Moment Connection First. 938 | Chapter 24 Structural . click . 29 On the Design Bar. “Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels” on page 938. you create new levels. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. In this exercise. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. This project file is required.

Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. double-click Building Elevation. 2 Select grid 1.Defining New Levels In this exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Level. you create several new levels. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. select Make Plan View. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. under Elevations. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Click to add Level 3. Structural_tutorial. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. 5 On the Options Bar. Defining New Levels | 939 . You need at least 3 meters of space. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser.

Structural_tutorial. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. “Duplicating the Existing Design” on page 940. click Save. This project file is required. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise.In the Project Browser. click . In this exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 940 | Chapter 24 Structural . Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. These levels that are required in the next exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 8 On the File menu. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. in its current state. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. Each level is 3000 mm high. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. you created three new levels.

In the next lesson. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. Duplicating the Existing Design | 941 . to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. double-click Building Elevation. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. In this exercise. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. “Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation” on page 942. 6 In the Select Levels dialog.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. press and hold CTRL. under Elevations. Make sure the entire building model is included. select Level 3. click OK. 8 On the File menu. click Save. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. 5 In the Select Levels dialog. and select Levels 4 and 5. in its current state. you copied the existing structural elements on Level 1 and used the paste-align command to create the structural framing on the upper levels. This project file is required. 3 On the Edit menu. 7 In the Project Browser. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Edit menu. click Copy to Clipboard.

you create a framing elevation. double-click Level 2. click Modify. Elevation 1-a. 5 Place the cursor over grid C. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. 4 On the Options Bar. in the Project Browser. click Framing Elevation. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members.Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. You can now view the new elevation. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click. 942 | Chapter 24 Structural . 2 Zoom out so you can see the entire building model. Structural_tutorial. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. make sure Attach to Grid is selected.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. under Floor Plans. 6 On the Design Bar.

In the next exercise. This project file is required. you add structural braces to the building model.7 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. “Adding Structural Braces” on page 943. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. Adding Structural Braces | 943 . Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. In this exercise. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. Structural_tutorial. Notice the stick framing representation. 8 On the File menu. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. in its current state. click Save. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. You are ready to add the structural braces.

5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. When adding the braces.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. Also select grids 2 and 3 and drag them until they appear as shown. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects.4. and using the shape grips. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. click Brace. 944 | Chapter 24 Structural . selectM_ C-Channel: C75x7. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you use point-to-point insertion. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. select the view crop box.

Adding Structural Braces | 945 . The second brace is displayed.The brace displays. 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. 7 Enter SE and click the endpoint below the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4.

Select Constrain. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click Tag All Not Tagged. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint.Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. specify the following: Click . click Modify. 946 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Array. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. Select 2nd for Move to. Enter 4 for Number. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Edit menu.

select Structural Framing Tags. 17 On the File menu. and click OK. you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. 16 On the View toolbar. click Save. click . In this exercise.15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Adding Structural Braces | 947 .

948 | Chapter 24 Structural .

they cannot make changes to it. such as walls. called Worksharing. and so on. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. floors.Sharing Projects 25 When working with large building projects. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. however. doors. In this tutorial. A workset is a collection of building elements. stairs. Using Worksharing. You can enable Worksharing for any project. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. All other team members can view this workset. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2008. 949 . If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time.

such as annotations and dimensions. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. After learning the fundamentals. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. you must first enable Worksharing. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Project size 950 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. When you are working on a shared project. When setting up Worksharing. use Element Borrowing. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. To make a workset editable. and click Editable. Working in a shared project In a shared project. Elements specific to a view. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. select the desired workset. you specify an active workset. After the project is shared. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you can select which worksets are open or closed. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. In the next exercise. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. go to the Worksets dialog. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. The first time you activate worksets within a project.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project.

with each assigned a specific functional task. In most projects. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. designers work in teams. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. for a typical project. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. As new members create worksets for their own use. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Regardless of the default setting. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. When creating the new worksets. Instead. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. You should have at least one workset for each person. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. each team member has control over a portion of the design. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Experience has shown that. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. When you create a new workset. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. not including the Project Standards. On this tab. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Shared Levels and Grids. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing.The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. such as a tenant interior. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. and View worksets. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 951 . Team member roles Typically. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. In a multi-story structure.

When finished or at regular intervals. Therefore. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. you make that workset editable by you. After saving to the central file. On the Options Bar. When you save to the central file. however. your changes are saved.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. When you save to the central file. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. your changes propagate to the entire team. This makes them available to other team members.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. if a workset named Interior was created. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. However. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. proceeds as usual. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. you should then save to your local file. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. This is called “Selective Open. 952 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . within the local file. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. For example. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. As you work. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. Generally. you can select which workset is active. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. When you save locally (to your local file). Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. the file is saved as the central file.

In this situation. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. To do this. and then save the local file. In the next exercise. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. When working remotely. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. click Training Files. you work no differently then you would in the office. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. if you know who checked out the required workset. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. make any required worksets editable. using VPN. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. In this conceptual exercise. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. reload the latest changes from the central file." Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. for instance. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you should check out the Materials workset. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable.rvt. Alternatively. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. and make that workset editable. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. In this instance. save to the central file. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. and open Common\c_Worksets. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 953 .

select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. Only User-Created worksets should display. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. For training purposes. and Views. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1".Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. Your username displays as the present owner. clear Families. ■ 6 Under Show. a small number of team members are working on the building model. and notice all are editable by you. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. In this case. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. The Worksets dialog is displayed. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. 954 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . another is assigned the interior layout. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. imagine four users including yourself. click Worksets. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. For example. 3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. When you enable worksharing. Project Standards. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. 4 In the Worksets dialog. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset name. Therefore. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. under Show. In this simple training project. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset.

Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. click . expand Views (all). under Identity Data. 24 Select all of the interior elements. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. select Interior Layout for Workset. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. Because the interior walls appear in many views. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. 20 Click OK. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. 15 In the Worksets dialog. click . and walls. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. select Workset1. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 10 Click New. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 955 . type the name Exterior Shell. you can rename the default workset. click OK. You do. including the interior doors. under Identity Data. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 21 Select one of the interior walls. however. 12 In the Worksets dialog. click New.Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. 18 On the Options Bar. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. When you initially activate Worksharing. it is better to make them visible by default. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. 13 Click Rename. 9 Click OK. In this training file. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. clear Visible by default in all views. 14 In the Rename dialog. 17 In the drawing area. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. currently named Workset1. 22 On the Options Bar. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. stairs.

25 On the Options Bar.The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. select Interior Layout for Workset. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 956 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. click the Worksets tab. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. click the Worksets tab. under Identity Data. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 31 On the View menu. If any interior elements remain. 30 Click OK. 27 On the View menu. click . 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view.

In addition. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. double-click Level 2. under Identity Data. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Now that you have created the central file. under Open Worksets. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. under Views (all). If you have not yet completed the exercise. “Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets” on page 953. click Save As. 42 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. 2 In the Open dialog. click Open. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. Working Individually with Worksets | 957 . Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. click Close. 3 Click Open. check out worksets. click Worksets. make sure you remember the location of this central file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select Specify. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. you create your local file. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. click Non Editable. make modifications to the building model. In this exercise. you enabled Worksharing on a project. click . 36 On the Options Bar. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 44 Click OK. 35 In the drawing area. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 45 On the File menu.33 Select Interior Layout. and click OK. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 39 In the Save As dialog. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. 34 In the Project Browser. select the central file and. please do so before continuing. 40 Click Save. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 On the right side of the dialog. select Interior Layout for Workset. under Floor Plans.

you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. expand Floor Plans. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 958 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . If this is selected. select Interior Layout for Name. In this case. 6 In the Save As dialog. click Modify. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. select Interior Layout. 10 In the Worksets dialog. click Options. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. select all the User-Created worksets. On the Options Bar. 5 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click . 12 On the Window menu. Verify that it is cleared. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. click Worksets. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and click Save. expand Views (all). and click OK. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. 11 Click OK. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. and double-click Level 1.4 In the Opening Worksets dialog. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. Next. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 17 On the Options Bar. click Save As. and click OK. Before working on the model. and select Yes for Editable. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. 7 In the File Save Options dialog. notice the Editable Only option. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset.

notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. In the Worksets dialog. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. click Worksets. 28 In the Type Selector. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. click . Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 22 On the File menu. If it was owned by another user. Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 20 On the Options Bar. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 21 Click OK.126mm Partition (2-hr). select Basic Wall: Interior . Working Individually with Worksets | 959 . and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 Click OK.18 In the Element Properties dialog. however. 19 Under Constraints. In this case. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. under Identity Data. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. click Wall. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. The precise location is not important. you can still edit this wall. and click OK. 25 Delete the door. Because this element is not owned by another user.

If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. When working in your local file. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. Whenever you save. save to central. a tooltip. In addition. The Save to Central dialog is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. By default. At the end of a work session. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. In this particular case. add two door openings into the rooms you created.30 On the Design Bar. which matches the information in the Status Bar. displays the workset as well as the element type. 36 In the Save to Central dialog. select: ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets 960 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. you should perform regular saves. 34 Using the following illustration as a guide. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. click Door. 33 In the Type Selector. and save locally immediately afterward. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. click Modify. you should relinquish all worksets. it is recommended. Borrowed Elements is selected. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. click Save to Central. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it.

Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. leave this file open in its current state. 3 On the Settings menu. two users access the central file through a network connection. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. under Username. make elements editable. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. click Options. Throughout the process. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 961 . Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 7 In the Open dialog. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. under Open Worksets. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and proceed to Creating a local copy. skip the following section. For training purposes. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. select Specify. In the following section of this exercise. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. select the central file and. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. click Open. and click OK. one user has already created a local file. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. This is a system setting. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. User 2: Create a local file. instructions are staggered. For training purposes. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. each user must check out worksets. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 8 Click Open. In addition. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. In this exercise. 4 Click the General Tab and. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. and reload the latest changes. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). specifically sequenced. checked out worksets. consider that person to be User 1. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened.■ Save the local file after “Save to Central” 37 Click OK. and reset the Username to your computer login name.rvt. select all the User-Created worksets. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. return to the Settings dialog. please do so before continuing. enter User 2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. If you have not yet completed these exercises. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. you created your local file. You modified the building model.

User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. and select Yes for Editable. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 22 Click OK. and click OK. 11 In the Save As dialog. expand Views (all). modify the building model. expand Floor Plans. it becomes the active workset. If you only have one workset checked out. click Save to Central. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. 16 Click OK. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. and double-click Level 1. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. If it is not open. click Options. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. open it now. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 14 On the File menu. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 26 On the File menu. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. This file is for your use only. and double-click Level 1. click Worksets. 23 In the Project Browser. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. expand Views (all). That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 18 On the File menu. and click Save. User 1: Check out worksets. 962 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . You now have a local copy of the project. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2.10 On the File menu. You are now the owner of that workset. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists.” 28 Click OK. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. click Worksets. and select Yes for Editable. click Save As. expand Floor Plans.

46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 33 In the Save to Central dialog. 42 On the Project Browser. Before adding any furniture. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. you should create a furniture plan view. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict.” 38 Click OK. Click Yes. under Floor Plans. 45 On the Project Browser. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. click Save to Central. 41 Select Furniture Layout. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click Duplicate. and click Rename. A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 963 . 43 On the Project Browser. 36 On the File menu. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. under Floor Plans. However. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 32 On the File menu. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click Component. under Floor Plans. 44 In the Rename View dialog. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. When you save to central. click Worksets. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. right-click Copy of Level 1. User 1: Reload latest worksets. The changes User 2 made are apparent. select the lower exterior wall. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. click Save to Central.” 34 Click OK. 40 On the File menu.30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Reload Latest. under Views (all). select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. select Yes for Editable. and click OK. and click OK. right-click Level 1. 37 In the Save to Central dialog.

Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and click OK. and click Properties. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 62 In the Worksets dialog. under Show.200mm. 64 Click OK. click Edit/New. click the Worksets tab. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 964 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . click Reload Latest. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. click Save to Central. 58 In the Type Properties dialog. leave this file open in its current state. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. are placed under Project Standards. enter Exterior Wall . 57 In the Element Properties dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. the Visible by default option was not selected.” 54 Click OK. choose any desk. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. NOTE System families. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. Therefore. click Rename. click Modify. click Save to Central. 48 On the Design Bar. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. 52 On the File menu. 59 In the Rename dialog. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. click Worksets. select Project Standards. 60 Click OK 3 times. and click inside any room. 65 On the File menu. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” 67 Click OK. and click OK. 49 On the View menu. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. such as Wall Types. 53 In the Save to Central dialog. 61 On the File menu.47 In the Type Selector. rather than Families. 66 In the Save to Central dialog. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset.

they are referred to as User 1 and User 2.rvt. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). select Save to Central. finished the previous workset exercises. select Make this a Central File after save. select Reload Latest. leave this file open in its current state. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. click Training Files. and save 68 On the File menu. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. 5 Click Save. Checking out worksets. you save the dataset as a central file. and these problems are rectified. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and click OK. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 965 . If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. There are specific instructions for each user. At the appropriate point in this exercise. In the final exercise of this tutorial. 4 In the File Save Options dialog. select the following. and still have your local files open.User 1: Reload latest. and published their changes back to the central file. Each user checked out worksets. you need to set up your central and local files. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. “Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users” on page 965. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. and click OK. throughout this training. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. As each of you work. click Save As. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. modified the building model. This exercise requires two users and. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. In subsequent steps. 3 In the Save As dialog. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Each user must have network access to the central file. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” In this exercise. click Options. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. 70 In the Save to Central dialog. 69 On the File menu.

verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Worksets. 966 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . 17 On the File menu. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. 7 On the File menu. and click Save. 18 In the Save As dialog. 13 On the File menu. This is the local file for User 1. and reset the Username to your computer login name. select them. On the Settings menu. the user that saved the central file should be User 1.User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. click Options. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. Next. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. select Specify. 9 In the Save As dialog. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. 14 In the Open dialog. select the central file and under Open Worksets. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 23 In the Worksets dialog. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click Save. You have created a local file which is for your use only. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click OK. 15 Click Open. click Save As. and click Open. click Open. This is a system setting. click Save As. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Options. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Afterwards. and click OK. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. click Options. 10 In the File Save Options dialog. Set the Username to User 2. return to the Settings dialog. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. and click OK. and click OK. In addition. if any User-Created worksets are not open. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. The central file should still be open.

A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. select Exterior Shell. select Interior Layout. under Floor Plans. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall.24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. You are now the owner of that workset. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 967 . a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. click Worksets. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. 27 In the Worksets dialog. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. After you submit the request. and click Editing Requests. 25 Under Active Workset. double-click Level 1. and then click OK. and then click OK. 30 On the Options Bar. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. and select Yes for Editable. At this point. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. You are now the owner of that workset. select the Interior Layout workset. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select the second window from the top. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. and select Yes for Editable. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. click the File menu. 31 On the left exterior wall. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimens